ZR70 MC A ZR65 MC A ZR60 A ZR70 MC A ZR65 MC A ZR60 A

Transcription

Video Product
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
No. D17-7312
Digital Video Camera
NTSC
Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2003
First Edition : Feb. 2003
First Print : Feb. 2003
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-1 Concepts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2 Main Features -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2-1 Direct Printer Compatible ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1-2-2 DV Messenger -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1-3 Function and Performance List ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-3
1-4 Function and Performance Comparison Chart ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-4
2. Technical Explanation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
2-1 Design --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
2-1-1 Concept --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
2-1-2 Variation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
2-2 DMC III Digital Mechanism Chassis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
2-2-1 Improved Quality ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
2-2-2 Configuration Comparison of DMC II and DMC III ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
2-2-3 DMC III Slide In/Out Status --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12
2-3 Direct Print (Canon Camera Direct Correspondence Printer) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-13
2-3-1 Direct Print Operation Specifications ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
2-3-2 Calling Up the Direct Print Setting Screen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
3. Performance and Functions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-24
5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-25
5-1 Camera Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-25
5-2 VCR Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-32
5-3 Card/Camera Mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only) -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-36
5-4 Card Playback Mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-39
5-5 Menu Display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-41
5-6 Card-Related Screen Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-52
5-7 Direct Print Setting Screen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
5-8 Print ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-63
5-9 Warning Displays --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-64
6. Backing Up Various Data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-66
6-1 Backup by Main Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-66
6-2 Backup by Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Lithium Coin Primary Battery) ------------------------------ 1-66
6-3 Backup Conditions Related to Switch Operation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-67
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-67
6-3-2 Switching the Power Switch to a Different Position ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-68
6-3-3 Switching Camera Modes/Switching Program AE Modes ---------------------------------------------------------- 1-69
7. Other Features -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
7-1 Green Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
7-2 On Screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
7-3 Headphones and Speaker ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-71
7-4 Battery Indicator, Low-Power Warning, and Low-Power Shutoff ------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-5 System Data Displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-6 Data Code Display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-7 MP Tape Support --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-8 Confirmation Beep ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-72
7-9 Using Analog Line Recording and DV Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-73
7-10 Support for Analog Signal I/O Copyright Protection Signals ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1-74
7-11 Video ID1 Detection/Output Support -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-74
7-12 Audio Dubbing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-75
7-12-1 Tapes to which Audio Dubbing can be Added ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-75
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source ------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-75
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-75
7-12-4 CGMS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-75
7-13 AV Insert (Not available on PAL Models) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-76
7-13-1 Tapes Allowing AV Insert ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-76
7-13-2 AV Insert Signal Input Source Selection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-76
7-13-3 AV Insert Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-76
7-13-4 CGMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-76
7-14 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-77
7-14-1 A/D Signal Conversion Pocedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-77
7-14-2 CGMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-77
7-15 Multi Switch ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-77
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A, ZR60 A
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1. Product Overview
1-1 Concepts
Multi Media
Compact & Stylish Camcorder
The ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A, ZR60 A is more stylish than the ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A,
ZR47 MC KR, ZR40 A and delivers functions to rival multimedia models.
◆ Benefits from efforts to reform the cost structure of the Canon lineup.
◆ Deluxe, more stylish design.
◆ Retains the superb performance of the ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A, ZR47 MC KR, ZR40 A series while
adding multimedia features.
◆ More advanced picture quality than the ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A, ZR47 MC KR, ZR40 A.
◆ Available in three separate models to meet a range of user requirements.
1-2 Main Features
(1) Compact & Stylish
● New Stylish Design
(2) High Performance Lens
● 22× optical zoom lens compatible with 1/ 6- inch CCD (ZR70 MC A only)
(3) Excellent Picture Quality
● MACS system for improved picture quality
(4) Multimedia
● Memory card slot, USB terminal (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
● Motion- JPEG (ZR70 MC A only) Camera Direct
● Camera Direct
(5) Advanced Specification
● Advanced accessory shoe (ZR70 MC A only)
● New Digital Feature
(6) All In One
● 2.5- inch LCD and CVF, terminals on camera body
1-1
1-2-1 Direct Printer Compatible
Easy to connect and easy to print
◆ Printing XGA still images stored on a memory card is simple.
ZR70 MC, ZR65 MC
XGA-size (1024 × 768) still images
Direct Printer
Camera Direct Printer
(BJ F890PD)
(BJ 895PD)
(BJ 535PD)
Control printer from DVC
Printer cable
1-2-2 DV Messenger
A peer-to-peer type bidirectional communications software program for linking digital video camcorders and PCs.
◆ Allows bidirectional sending of audio or video content and messages (text or images) via the Internet.
◆ Basic specifications are compatible with Windows Messenger.
◆ Allows control (camera zoom and focus, VCR playback and stop, access to the memory card) of the digital video camcorder
from a remote PC.
IEEE1394
Internet
IEEE1394
1-2
1-3 Function and Performance List
Specifications
ZR70 MC A
Zoom mag.
ZR65 MC A
22× optical zoom/
20× optical zoom/
18× optical zoom/
440× digital zoom*1
CCD
1/6-inch interlaced CCD (total pixels : 680,000)
Image stabilization
Electronic image stabilizer (motion video effective pixels : 340,000)
Monitor
2.5-inch screen, 112,000 pixels LCD monitor
EVF
0.33-inch screen, 113,000 pixel color viewfinder
●
● *2
● (SD memory card, MultiMediaCard)
×
Analog line input
Memory card function
Card Still images
Progressive Photo
recording
Card motion video
ZR60 A
×
(1024×768, 640×480)
Motion JPEG + audio
recording
×
(monaural)
×
USB file transfer
●
×
USB direct print
●
×
IEEE1394 file
●
transfer
IEEE1394 streaming
●
video
●
USB compatible
×
● (Compatible with
Accessory shoe
●
advanced accessory shoe)
Auxiliary illumination
function
White LED
(Super Night mode: tape)
×
(Low light + time: card)
● (6 colors)
×
● (Super Night mode)
●
●
×
BP-512
BP-508
Illuminated keys
Night mode
Wide attachment lens
*1 : Tape mode only
*2 : Not applicable to PAL models
1-3
1-4 Function and Performance Comparison Chart
Item
Camera
Image sensing
Image size
device
1/6-inch CCD
Card
1/6-inch
System (filter)
Interlacing (color correction filters)
Total pixels
680,000 pixels
Effective pixels
Lens
Tape
Optical zoom
Tape
340,000 pixels
Card
447,000 pixels
Tape
magnification,
ZR70 MC A : 22× 2.8 - 61.6 mm (approx. 54 - 1,188 mm)
ZR65 MC A : 20× 2.8 - 56 mm (approx. 54 - 1,080 mm)
focal length
ZR60 A
(35mm equivalent)
: 18× 2.8 - 50.4 mm (approx. 54 - 972 mm)
Card
ZR70 MC A : 22× 2.8 - 61.6 mm (approx. 48 - 1,056 mm)
Tape
ZR70 MC A : 88× /440× 246.4 mm / 1,232 mm
ZR65 MC A : 20× 2.8 - 56 mm (approx. 48 - 960 mm)
Digital zoom
magnification
Magnification,focal
length
(35mm
equivalent)
(equivalent to approx. 4,752 mm / 23,760 mm)
ZR65 MC A : 80× /400× 224 mm / 1,120 mm
ZR 60 A
: 72× /360× 201.6 mm / 1,008 mm
System
Noise reduction
Card
None
Tape
CCD readout
Card
-----
F number
ZR70 MC A : F1.6 - 3.6, ZR65 MC A : F1.6 - 3.2, ZR60 A : F1.6 - 2.9
Aperture blades
2
Zoom speed
Variable
Filter diameter
30.5mm P0.5
Camera
Tape
Card
Either CCD-NR or Y/C-NR
Motion
video
Still
images
None
Chroma-only, median filter
Recorder
C-NR
Minimum
Night mode
1.6 lx
illumination
Low Light mode
3.4 lx
Auto mode
Image
stabilization
14 lx
Adjustment
Tape
system
Card
Sensing method
Electronic
None
Angular velocity sensing
Shooting functions
AE mode
Program AE
Tape
(Full Auto)
(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night,
Super Night (ZR70 MC A only))
Card
(Full Auto)
(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light,
Low Light+ (ZR70 MC A only))
Photometric
Center-bottom-weighted average
system
Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Super Night (ZR70
MC A only)
Evaluative photometry +
128 segments (Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode (Sand & Snow mode))
All area photometry
1-4
Item
Shooting functions
Exposure
AE lock
×
adjustment
AE shift
Supported (after pressing Setting key, adjust using Multi-switch and press
Setting key again) ± 2 steps
(Disabled during Green mode, Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode, Night
mode, and Super Night mode)
Shutter speed
Exposure correction
×
Gain setting/sensitivity increase
Auto
Back light correction
×
High-speed shutter
Tape
6 levels
(1/60, 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, second. (Auto mode))
Auto
Card
Switches upper limit to 1/250 second (included Program AE)
Tape
1/60 sec - 1/500 sec.
Card
Slow shutter
1/30 sec - 1/250 sec.
1/15 sec (Low Light mode, Low Light +), 1/8 sec to 1/60 sec (Night
mode, Super Night mode)
Aperture value
Auto iris
Image quality
Color gain adjustment
×
adjustment
Hue adjustment
×
(custom preset)
Sharpness adjustment
×
Setup adjustment
×
White Balance
Focus
Auto
●
Preset
Outdoor, Indoor
System
TTL, 128 segments
Mode
AF/MF, forced infinity
Manual focus
16:9
Multi-switch operation
Recording system
Tape
Vertical Stretching
Card
×
×
Area marker display
Digital fade
Tape
Motion video
Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
(executed by pressing the Start/Stop button.)
Card
Still Image
×
Motion video
×
Still Image
×
Digital effect
Tape
Motion video/still Image Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card
Motion video/still Image Black & White
Card mix
Tape
Motion video/still Image Card Lumi key, Card Chroma key, Camera Chroma key, Animation
Card
Motion video/still Image ×
Multi-screen
Tape
Motion video/still Image Supported (disabled in Night mode and Super Night mode)
Card
Motion video/still Image ×
Capture speed
1/60 sec.
Manual, Fast (every 4th field), Normal (every 6th field),
Shutter speed
Slow (every 8 fields)
1/15 sec.
Manual, Fast (every 4 fields), Normal (every 8 fields),
Shutter speed
Slow (every 12 fields)
Tape
Normal
Card
320 × 240 pixels (continuous, approx. 10 seconds), 160 × 120 pixels
(ZR70 MC A only)
(continuous, approx. 30 seconds)
Motion video
shooting
Mode
1-5
Item
Shooting functions
Still image
Mode
Tape
Normal (field)
Card
Progressive (iris shutter) (disabled in Night mode)
Tape
6.5 sec.
recording time
Card
×
Continuous
Tape
×
shooting
Card
×
Photo button
Form
Still image only button
Single image
Half depressed
Supported (recording standby only)
Still image confirmation
Only with card mounted
Strobe support (models)
×
Recorded image
Frame image (video output is field image)
Frame processing
Pseudo frame (Low Light mode, Night mode, Super Night (Slow) mode)
Negative-positive reversal
×
Video light
× (For only ZR70 MC A, white LED is provided (turned ON in
super-night mode, low-light mode))
Zebra pattern
×
Color bar display
×
Selftimer
10 sec./remote control: 2 sec.
Interval timer
×
Clear scan
×
Recorded image size/file format
VGA: 640(H) × 480 (V), XGA: 1024(H) × 768(V)/JPEG (ZR70 MC A,
ZR65 MC A only)
Memory card
SD memory card, MultiMediaCard
REC search
●
REC review
●
Standby switch
×
Power save (after 5 minutes in Recording pause)
Power shutoff
Displayed text recording
×
Audio
16-bit 2-channel (48KHz)
12-bit 4-channel (32 kHz) Simultaneous 4-channel recording not possible
● ON/OFF switch (built-in microphone only)
Wind screen
EVF
Monitor LCD
Size
0.33-inch (TFT color RGB delta arrangement)
Pixels
113,000
Brightness adjustment
×
Color adjustment
×
Movable
×
Size
2.5-inch
Pixels
112,000
●
Movable
● Supports mirror shooting
1-6
Item
VCR
Playback
Frame playback
system
Slow playback
Forward/Reverse
2X SP playback
Forward/Reverse
1X SP playback
Forward/Reverse
Cue/review
9.5X speed
Search
Forward/Reverse
Photo search
●
Date search
●
Index search
×
● (Tape playback or card still image playback)
Special playback Playback zoom (2X zoom)
effects
D. effects
D. fade
Multi screen
Data code display
Card
Tape
Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card
×
Tape
Auto fade, Wipe, Corner wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zig Zag, Beam, Tide
Card
×
4/9/16 screen (tape only)
Time and Date display
Slide show
● (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Index playback
(6-screen playback)
Card fast forward/rewind
●
Audio dubbing
AV insert
Digital
●
Analog
●
●
Zero set memory
Edit function
Card jump (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Simple editing
×
Special effects
×
1-7
Item
System
●
Inter face
Microphone input
(terminal)
Headphone output
●
DV terminal
Input/output
S terminal
Input/output
AV terminal
Input/output, φ3.5mm jack (also serves as headphone terminal)
Editing terminal (LANC terminal)
×
USB port (mini-B Receptacle)
Memory card file transfer
DV to Analog signal conversion
●
Direct print
● (When connected to BJ 535PD or BJ 895PD camera direct printer:
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Border yes/no and number of copies can be set (DPOF compatible)
World clock
●
Text titles
×
Speaker
●
Confirmation beep
●
Tally light
×
1 and
2,
Remote control cord
Supports
Accessory shoe
● (ZR70 MC A only; supports advanced accessory shoe)
Video ID
● (ID2)
Recording modes
SP,LP
Illuminated keys
● (6 colors: ZR70 MC A only)
Custom key
×
Index Screen key
Card mix key
Slideshow key
DV control
×
Internal battery charging
●
Backup power
Lithium coin battery (CR1616)
Battery pack power
BP-500 series lithium ion battery
1-8
● External View
Fig. 1-1
1-9
2. Technical Explanation
2-1 Design
2-1-1 Concept
The design of the ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A, ZR47 MC KR,
ZR40 A has been further refined with the introduction of a more
streamlined surface.
The popular layout of the ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A, ZR47 MC
KR, ZR40 A has been retained.
The MENU buttons have been moved out of the LCD to improve ease of use.
Independently illuminated keys are used (ZR70 MC A) and the
feel of the colored clear keys enhanced (both ZR65 MC A and
ZR60 A).
The front terminal cover is now finished with metallic paint on
all models (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A, and ZR60 A) for a more
deluxe look.
2-1-2 Variation
ZR70 MC A
Illuminated keys
(with white LEDs)
(22x zoom)
Champagne metallic
(same as ZR50 MC A)
Cover L: Silver (paint)
EVF: Silver (paint)
ZR65 MC A
Blue clear keys
EVF: Silver (paint)
(20x zoom)
ZR 60 A
Blue clear keys
EVF: Gray
(color of molded plastic)
(18x zoom)
Blue metallic
(same as ELURA40 MC A)
Dark blue metallic (new color)
Cover L: Gray (color of molded plastic)
Cover L: Gray (color of molded plastic)
1-10
2-2 DMC III Digital Mechanism Chassis
2-2-1 Improved Quality
The DMC I and DMC II digital mechanism chassis, which formed the core of previous Canon camcorder models, were developed in
1997 and 1999, respectively. They helped make those camcorders more compact. In particular, as the excellent image quality and
reliability of Canon camcorders has come to be highly evaluated by the marketplace in recent years, the number of units manufactured
has been increasing substantially. The DMC III digital mechanism chassis was developed with the aims of further improving reliability,
by drastically reducing the number of component parts, and also enhancing quality. At the same times, the developers worked to reduce
the cassette loading time and improve ease of operation.
Digital mechanism chassis
period
Drum diameter
DMC III
DMC II
October 2002
January 2000
21.7mm
21.7mm
●
●
56mm
56mm
Slide
Size
Depth
Width
72mm
72mm
Height
23.7mm
22.2mm
Volume
95cc
89cc
Weight
100g
100g
Number of parts
194
272
FF/REW speed
30x
30x
2-2-2 Configuration Comparison of DMC II and DMC III
DMC III
DMC II
72mm
56mm
22.2mm
23.7mm
72mm
56mm
1-11
2-2-3 DMC III Slide In/Out Status
Slide out status
23.7mm
39.4mm
Slide in status
56mm
73mm
1-12
2-3 Direct Print (Canon Camera Direct Correspondence Printer)
By connecting the Canon BJ F890PD or BJ 895PD or BJ 535PD camera direct correspondence printer to the product (ZR70 MC A),
the user can print still images stored on an SD memory card or MultiMediaCard without using a PC.
Note: This function is not compatible with the CP-100 or CP-10 card photo printer.
2-3-1 Direct Print Operation Specifications
Compatible printers
BJ F890PD/BJ 895PD/BJ 535PD
Functions
1 image
●
Partial image
×
Border yes/no
●
Date yes/no
×
Number of copies
●
DPOF specified printing
●
Index printing
×
Trimming
×
Operation keys
Change button focus
Multi switch (up-down)
Confirmation button
Setting button
Card image advance Card
image advance + and - buttons
2-3-2 Calling Up the Direct Print Setting Screen
(1) The camcorder must be in the Card Playback mode with the BJ 895PD connected and
the BJ 895PD powered on.
In the upper left-hand corner of the screen two icons marked Print and Settings are
displayed. If a memory card with images stored on it is mounted in the camcorder, the
last image recorded is displayed on the screen.
(2) Press the Setting switch.
The camcorder switches to the Direct Print mode.
Turn the Multi switch to select Print, Cancel, No. of Copies, or Style (Border or No
Border) and specify the setting for the desired item. (Refer to page 60 for details of
the screen.)
L Size
Borderless
The direct print setting specifications are basically the same as those for a digital
Style
camera.
However, the card image advance item on the setting screen is unique to video cameras, and the Advance button works at all times except when an image displayed in
reduced size is in the process of being printed.
Copies
OK
Cancel
Other
(1) The image larger than 160 × 120 dots and smaller than 2024 × 1536 dots can be printed. However, the file larger than 2MB cannot
be printed.
(2) Animation image cannot be printed.
1-13
3. Performance and Functions
1 Type
2 Recording system
2-1 Video signal recording system
Quantized bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system
2-3 Tracking
2-4 Tape speed
2-5 Head drum
Drum diameter
Rpms
Heads
VTR- integrated camera
Rotating two- head helical scan azimuth recording
Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
Complies with NTSC system (525 lines, 60 fields)
Digital component recording.
R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz
8bits
PCM digital recording.
16-bit, 48KHz 2 ch (Stereo 1)
12-bit, 32KHz 4 ch (Stereo 1 and 2)
2-frequency pilot system
Approx. 18.81mm/second. (in SP mode)
Approx. 12.56mm/second. (in LP mode)
φ 21.7mm
9000/ 1.001 rotations/ minute
Video heads: 2
3 Recording/ playback time
80 minutes maximum (in SP mode)
120 minutes maximum (in LP mode)
Continuous recording time using battery/ actual recording time
ZR70 MC A
BP-508
Approx. --- minutes/ --- minutes (using CVF),
BP-512
Approx. 180 minutes/ 95 minutes (using CVF),
BP-522
Approx. 370 minutes/195 minutes (using CVF),
BP-535
ZR65 MC A
BP-508
BP-512
BP-522
BP-535
ZR60 A
BP-508
BP-512
BP-522
BP-535
4 Cassette tape specifications
Mini DVC specs
4-1 Tape type
Vapor- deposited metal tape
4-2 Tape width
6.35mm Vapor- deposited metal tape
4-3 Tape thickness
7µm
5 Camera
5-1 Image sensing device
1/ 6- inch interlaced CCD
5-1-1 Pixels
Total pixels
Approx. 680,000
Actual effective pixels
Approx. 340,000 (tape)
Approx. 447,000 (card)
5-1-2 Filter
Color correction filter
5-1-3 Color separation system
Differential read out
5-1-4 Signal configuration
NTSC standard color TV signal
5-1-5 Scanning system
525 lines × 60 fields / 30 frames
5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination
Auto mode
Approx. 14 lx
Low light mode
Approx. 3.4 lx
Night mode
Approx. 1.6 lx
5-1-7 Subject illumination range
Approx. 1.6 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
1-14
Approx. --- minutes/ --- minutes (using LCD)
Approx. 140 minutes/ 75 minutes (using LCD)
Approx. 295 minutes/155 minutes (using LCD)
5-2 Photo lens
5-2-1 Nominal focal length
Tape recording ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
Card recording ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
5-2-2 Nominal aperture ratio
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
5-2-3 Lens configuration
5-2-4 Focus adjustment
5-2-5 Minimum object distance
5-2-6 Power zoom
Using optical zoom
Using electronic zoom
5-2-7 Focal length display
5-2-8 Macro mechanism
5-2-9 Macro shooting distance
5-2-10 Filter diameter
5-2-11 Accessory lens, filter
5-2-12 Lens hood
5-2-13 Lens cap
5-3 Digital zoom (tape recording only)
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
5-4 Image stabilization function
5-4-1 System
5-4-2 Shaking sensing system
5-5 Shooting modes
5-5-1 Tape shooting mode
Photo mode
2.8 to 61.6 mm 22x zoom (35 mm equivalent: 54 to 1,188 mm)
2.8 to 56 mm 20x zoom (35 mm equivalent: 54 to 1, 080 mm)
2.8 to 50.4 mm 18x zoom (35 mm equivalent: 54 to 972 mm)
2.8 to 61.6 mm 22x zoom (35 mm equivalent: 48 to 1,056 mm)
2. 8 to 56 mm 20x zoom (35 mm equivalent: 48 to 960 mm)
——— (Card recording not supported)
1 : 1.6 (F3.6 on tele end)
1 : 1.6 (F3.2 on tele end)
1 : 1.6 (F2.9 on tele end)
11 elements in 8 groups, using one two- sided aspheric lens
Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by rotating multidial)
10 mm (AF linked; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip)
Multi- level variable- speed power zoom, slide lever system. The zoom speed can be changed
depending on the shift amount of the slide lever.
Approx. 2.1 seconds to approx. 23 seconds (Using tape)
Approx. 1.9 seconds to approx. 20 seconds (Using card)
Approx. 3.6 seconds to approx. 26 seconds (Using tape)
Approx. 2.5 seconds to approx. 22 seconds (Using card)
Manual zooming cannot be used (no zoom ring)
None. There is a simple zoom display in the viewfinder.
Wide end macro
10 mm (from lens front)
30.5 mm P0.5
Can use WD- 30.5, TL- 30.6, FS- 30.5U, or WA- 30.5 (WA- 30.5 is supplied with ZR70 MC A
model only.)
None
Included; Screw-on type
To 88x (approx. 246.4 mm (35 mm equivalent: 4,752 mm)), to 440x (approx. 1,232 mm (35 mm
equivalent: 23,760 mm))
To 80x (approx. 224 mm (35 mm equivalent: 4,320 mm)), to 400x (approx. 1,120 mm (35 mm
To 72x (approx. 201.6 mm (35 mm equivalent: 3,888 mm)), to 360x (approx. 1,008 mm (35 mm
Included (using tape only)
Electronic image stabilizer
Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor)
Motion Video mode, Photo mode (tape and card recording (card recording on ZR70 MC A,
ZR65 MC A only))
Normal motion video mode (Start and Stop button operation: interlaced scanning) or still image
mode (Photo button operation: field still)
Still image recording (frame recording; field recording during Card Mix in motion video mode)
for approx. 6.5 seconds
Half- push lock display ( ) for photo button in viewfinder: Displayed in green when AF is
locked.
5-5-2 Card recording (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
When the Photo button is operated in Card Recording mode, Progressive Photo images can be
saved as still images onto a MultiMedia Card or SD (Secure Digital) memory card.
Motion video and audio can be recorded on memory card by operating Start/ Stop button (ZR70
MC A only).
Recording format
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) compliant
Image compression format
JPEG format (Motion JPEG for motion video), switchable compression ratio (irreversible) (Super Fine, Fine, Standard), refer to section on memory card system (page 1-20)
1-15
5-6 Exposure control
5-6-1 AE function
Program AE
5-6-2 Photometric system
Screen segments
5-6-3 Exposure correction function
AE shift
AE Shift amount
5-6-4 Electronic shutter
High-speed shutter
Low-speed shutter
5-7 AF (Autofocus)
5-7-1 System
5-7-2 AF range finding area
5-7-3 Range finding window display
5-7-4 AF operating range
5-7-5 AF operating illumination range
5-7-6 AF mode switching
Manual focus
Infinity focus
5-8 Viewfinder
5-8-1
5-8-2
5-8-3
5-8-4
Rotation
Removal of eyepiece
Diopter movement range
Lens configuration
Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow
mode, Low Light mode, Low Light + mode (ZR70 MC A: Card and Camera modes only), Night
mode, Super Night mode (Super Night mode is ZR70 MC A only)
Center- bottom- weighted average :
Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light
mode, Low Light + mode (ZR70 MC A: Card and Camera modes
only), Night mode, Super Night mode (ZR70 MC A only)
Whole area average photometry + 128- segment evaluative photometry :
Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow mode
128 segments (16H × 8V)
AE shift is performed by pressing the AE Shift button. After AE shift, the AE level can be
corrected using the multidial (except in Full Auto mode, Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode
(Sand & Snow mode), Night mode or Super Night mode).
± 7 levels( –2.0, –1.5, –1.25, –1.0, –0. 75, –0.5, –0. 25, ±0, +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, +1.0, +1.25,
+1.5, +2.0).
Indicated by a number (AE ± 0) in the viewfinder.
1/ 60 second, 1/ 100 second, 1/ 250 second, 1/ 500 second, 1/ 1000 second, 1/ 2000 second (can
be selected in Auto mode)
Up to 1/ 250 second in Card mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A models)
When image stabilizer is ON: 1/ 100 second (flickering sensed)
1/ 120 second (flickering not sensed)
When image stabilizer is OFF: 1/ 100 second (flickering sensed)
1/ 15 second (Low Light mode, Low Light + mode: constant speed)
1/ 60 second to 1/ 8 second (Night mode, Super Night mode)
(1/ 8 second to 1/ 500 second automatic setting in Night mode and Super Night mode (ZR70 MC
A only))
TTL–video signal sensing AF
Screen center
None.
10 mm to infinite (at wide end); 1 m to infinite in full zoom area (from lens front)
50 lx - 100,000 lx
Continuous AF/ manual focus/ infinity focus. AF can be turned ON/ OFF (by pressing Focus
button) except in Full Auto mode.
During manual focus (AF OFF), the (MF) display appears in the viewfinder.
The shooting distance can be forced to infinity by holding down the ∞ side of the Multi- switch
in the manual focus mode.
0.33- inch screen, color LCD (approx. 113,000 pixels), ON when LCD monitor is closed (panel
facing inwards) and during mirror shooting
Possible (70° upward to support low- angle shooting)
Possible
+1.0 to –5.0 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)
Two elements in two groups
1-16
5-9 LCD panel
2.5- inch screen, color LCD, approx. 112,000 pixels (480 (H) × 234 (V)) TFT active matrix drive.
RGB delta arrangement; ON except when monitor is closed (panel facing inwards)
5-9-1 Angle adjustment
Possible; monitoring is possible for high- angle, low- angle, and during mirror shooting.
5-9-2 Information display
Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining
tape, data code, warnings and other indications. Information display is not provided during mirror shooting.
Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder (CVF)
Camera mode and Card/Camera mode
LCD panel position
VCR mode/Card Playback mode
LCD panel
CVF
LCD panel
CVF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Panel closed (panel facing inwards)
Panel closed (panel facing outwards)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Panel open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Mirror shooting
*3
ON
*2
*1 : ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only
*2 : Can be set to Mirror mode through menu selection.
*3 : During Mirror mode, the screen display is flipped left- right (AE shift, window screen, 16:9, card mix, fader, effect,
shutter speed, date and time display) or does not appear (
/
card image quality, and recording size only).
Card Recording mode: No card
, Card Present and Access Indicator
<<<<
(Mirror mode is temporarily turned off during REC search and when a warning is displayed.)
5-10 White balance adjustment
TTL 128 segments, new white extraction system FAWB; includes set/ preset (outdoor: 5,600 k;
indoor: 3,200 k)
(selected through camera menu)
Adjustment range
5-11 Digital feature functions
2,800 k to 8,000 k
The following modes are provided: Fader, Effects, Multi-screen.
Fader
: Can be executed once when Fade mode is displayed in conjunction with pressing
the Start/Stop button (the mode display disappears when Fader ends).
Effects
: Effects are sustained until this function is turned off.
Multi-screen : A number of images, equal to the number of screen windows, are captured and
displayed manually or each time a fixed number of seconds passes. The display
remains until this function is turned off.
Card mix
: A mixture of included sample images, images recorded to a card, and camera
motion video is displayed. (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model only)
5-11-1 Fader (tape recording only)
Audio synchronized fader
Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas models: Black Fade),
Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide.
Fade time
Approx. 4 seconds.
5-11-2 Effects
Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
(Black and White only in card recording mode).
The effects function is toggled ON/OFF by pressing the D. Effect button.
5-11-3 Multi-screen (tape recording only; excludes Night mode)
Number of screens
4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operating modes
Manual, Fast (every 4 frames), Normal (every 6 frames), Slow (every 8 frames)
During Low Light mode, the settings are Fast (every 4 frames), Normal (every 8 frames), and
Slow (every 12 frames)
5-11-4 Card Mix (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Mix type
Mix type Card Chroma key, Card Lumi. key, Camera Chroma key (iPAL model not equipped
with Camera Chroma key)
Mix level adjustment
Adjustable, 32 levels
5-11-5 Availability in operation modes
Camera
Card (still image)
Card (motion video)
Tape (still image)
Fader
×
×
×
Effect
Black and White only
Black and White only
Multi-screen
×
×
Card Mix
×
×
1-17
Tape (motion video)
5-12 Built-in microphone
5-12-1 Wind screen function
5-13 Other additional functions
5-13-1 Time code
5-13-2 Data code
Time and date
Camera data
5-13-3 Accessory shoe
5-13-4 REC Search mechanism
5-13-5 REC Review function
Stereo (using electret condenser microphone)
Stereo provided by 2 nondirectional microphones and electric circuit
Provided, with ON/OFF switch (selected by menu; built-in microphone only)
Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area.
Though not displayed during recording, the date and camera information during recording are
automatically recorded and can be displayed during playback.
Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2003 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is
January 1, 2003)
World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date and time are automatically adjusted to the local date and time); supports daylight savings time.
During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or
time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.)
Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording),
and can be displayed during playback.
Included (advanced accessory shoe: ZR70 MC A only).
Included. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while
camera recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, the camera recording is paused again.)
Included. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused.
5-13-6 Zero Set Memory
Included. This function allows you to rewind or fast- forward the tape to the position where the
WL- D79/ WL- D80 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0: 00: 00).
(During recording, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.)
5-13-7 Remote control reception ON/ OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (through menu selection).
5-13-8 Headphone volume adjustment Possible. Can be adjusted using the multi- switch.
6 Recorder
6-1 Recording functions
6-1-1 Recording format
6-1-2 Tape speed SD spec
6-1-3 DV input recording
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording, analog input recording
Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
Approx. 18.81 mm/ second (in SP mode) , Approx. 12.56 mm/ second (in LP mode)
Complies with IEEE1394.
Records video/ audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording
Records analog video/ audio signals using an S Video terminal and AV terminal.
6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording DV terminal > S Video terminal > AV terminal
Insert Recording
Possible.
6-2-1 Insert-capable tape
Only tapes with SP recording can be used in Insert Recording.
Audio Dubbing Recording
Possible.
6-3-1 Audio Dubbing- capable tapes
Only tapes with 12- bit/ SP recording (other than 4- channel simultaneous recording) can be used
in Audio Dubbing Recording.
6-3-2 Audio dubbing signal input
Audio signal from LINE (AV terminal) or microphone (external > internal).
6-3-3 Switching To Audio Dubbing
Switch by pressing the Audio Dubbing button on the remote control during Playback Pause.
Playback functions
Standard Playback and Superb Playback
6-4-1 Standard Playback
a. Video
Video recorded in SP and LP modes
b. Audio
16-bit
Supports the following sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz.
12-bit
Sampling frequency: 32 kHz
Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio)
6-4-2 Superb Playback
Plays video only
a. Still image playback
Pure frame playback
b. Fast-forward playback
Approx. 9.5× speed.
c. Rewind playback
Approx. 9.5× speed.
d. Frame playback
Forward/reverse frame feeding
e. Slow playback
Forward/reverse 1/3× speed
f. 1× SP playback
Forward/reverse 1× speed
g. 2× SP playback
h. Edit search
Tape fast-forward/rewind time
Approx. 2 minutes. 20 seconds. (using 60-minute tape)
1-18
6-6 Input signals
6-6-1 DV terminal
SD format signals complying with IEEE1394– AV/ C protocol
6-6-2 AV terminal
a. Video signals
NTSC standard color video signals
Impedance
75 Ω
Signal level
1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signals
Signal type
Stereo audio signals
Impedance
40 KΩ or higher
Signal level
−10dBv
6-6-3 S Video terminal
Signal configuration
NTSC Y/C separated video signal
Impedance
75 Ω
Signal level
0.286Vp-p (color burst signal)
6-6-4 Microphone terminal
Impedance
5 KΩ or higher
Level
−57dBv (using 600 Ω microphone)
6-6-5 USB port (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Conforms to USB 1.1.
6-7 Output signals
6-7-1 DV terminal
6-7-2 AV terminal
a. Video signals
Output impedance
Output signal level
Horizontal resolution
Self re-recording
Camera EE out
b. Audio signals
Signal type
Output impedance
Output signal level
Frequency characteristic
Audio signal S/N
For microphone input
For external microphone input
6-7-3 S-video terminal
Video signal
Color signal
Brightness signal S/N
Horizontal ressolutin
Self re-recording
Camera EE out
Complies with IEEE1394– AV/ C protocol
NTSC standard color video signals
75 Ω
1Vp-p (composite)
Approx. 430 TV lines (screen center)
Catalog value: Approx. 430 TV lines (screen center)
Stereo audio signals
3 KΩ or less
−10dBv (with 47 KΩ load)
80 Hz to 12 KHz (1 KHz reference ±10 dB range)
48dB or higher
48dB or higher
NTSC Y/C separated video signal
1 Vp- p (brightness + synchronization signal)
0. 286 Vp- p (color burst signal)
45dB or higher
Conforms to camera EEout
Catalog value: Approx. 400 TV lines (screen center)
6-7-4 Headphone terminal
Also serves as AV I/ O terminal (switched through menu screen)
Output impedance
47Ω
Output signal level
−25dBv (with 16Ω load at maximum volume)
6-7-5 USB port (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Supports USB 1.1.
Compatible computer systems
Windows systems : IBM-compatible PC/ ATs, NEC PC98- NX Series
Macintosh systems : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook
Computer operating system
Windows systems : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Macintosh systems : Mac OS 8. 6 to X
1-19
6-8 Memory card system (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
6-8-1 Types of memory cards used
SD memory card, Multimedia card.
6-8-2 Recordable image types and image quality
Camera Card mode
Camera still images can be recorded by pressing the Photo button, and motion video can be
recorded by operating the Start/ Stop button. (ZR70 MC A only)
The Digital Effects function or Multi- screen function can be used.
VCR card mode
Still images can be recorded by pressing the Photo button (depress halfway to display still image,
depress fully to record) during tape playback, and motion video can be recorded by operating the
Start/ Stop button (approx. 10 seconds at 320 × 240 pixels and approx. 30 seconds at 160 × 120
pixels, 15 frames/ second). (ZR70 MC A only)
Also, DV input still images (no tape loaded or tape stopped) can be recorded by pressing the
Photo button (depress halfway to display DV input still image, depress fully to record), and
motion video (15 frames/ second) can be recorded by operating the Start/ Stop button.
Quality of still images recorded from tape or DV input to card
Source
Tape photo recording using
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A
Motion video recording
DV input
Line input
6-8-3 File names/folder names
Recording mode
Image recorded on card
NTSC/ PAL models
Progressive Frame images
NTSC/ PAL models
NTSC/ PAL models
NTSC/ PAL models
Simple pure frame images
The following folder names and file names are used for images saved to memory card after
formatting using the Format menu, based on DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) rules,
still image (Exif 2.2) file management specifications, and DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
file management specifications.
CANON DV
Card volume label
File types
Still image (Exif) file
Movie video file
Motion video thumbnail file *
Photo stitch
Zoom browser
DPOF file
Work file
Compression format
JPEG
Motion JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
TEXT
TEXT
Folder name and file name
//DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG
//DCIM/xxxCANON/MVI_yyyy.JPG
//DCIM/xxxCANON/MVI_yyyy.THM
//DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG
//DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG
//MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK
//DCIM/CANONMSC/xxx.tmp
Here, xxx stands for folder number, yyyy for file number, and z for letter from A to Z.
* Corresponds to motion video file with same file number.
DCF folder and file namd //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File No.
File number
Files are managed internally in the format Folder Number–File Number.
Photographed images are assigned file numbers between 0001 and 9900, and 100 image files are
stored per folder.
Individual folders are assigned numbers from 100 to 998 (but the numbers 199, 299, 399, 499,
599, 699, 799, and 899 are not used).
Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers
Folder numbers
File numbers
Stored files
100
0001
0002
0003
････
0099
0100
101
0101
0102
0103
････
0199
0200
102
0201
0202
0203
････
0299
0300
198
9801
9802
9803
････
9899
9900
200
0001
0002
0003
････
0099
0100
9801
9802
9803
････
9899
9900
Sample images included at time of shipping
･･･
Photographed image recording area
･･･
998
Photographed images start with the number 101-0101, and as a basic rule are numbered so as to
be greater than the Directory Number–File Number of files residing on a Memory card.
1-20
6-8-4 Still image recorded image size
XGA 1024(H) × 768(V) pixels
Number of recorded still images (SDC-8M)
Super Fine mode
14 (file size per image: approx. 440 kb)
Fine mode
Standard mode
6-8-5 Motion video recorded image size NTSC 320(H) × 240(V) pixels, 160(H) × 120(V) pixels 15 frame/second
Continuous recording time
Per shot
Approx. 10 seconds (Approx. 1.7MB), Approx. 30 second (Approx. 2.7MB)
Per size second
Approx. 170KB, Approx. 90KB
6-8-6 Card format
Cards should be formatted using the format command in the camcorder's menu. Cards formatted
on a PC cannot be guaranteed to function properly as they may malfunction depending on the
operating system.
6-8-7 Stitch Assist function
This is an effective way to combine (“stitch” together) photographed images to create a panoramic image, using a computer. (The supplied PhotoStitch program is used to combine images
on the user’s computer.) The stitch process works by finding the common portions of images that
adjoin each other, so the user should frame images in such a way that the common portions
contain a distinctive subject (a subject that serves as a landmark). The common portions in each
image should constitute between 30% and 50% of the frame width. Also, unevenness at the top
and bottom should not exceed 10% of the frame height.
6-9
Digital feature playback functions
The following modes are provided: Fader, Effect, Multi-screen.
· Can be executed once when Fader mode is displayed in conjunction with pressing the
/
button (the mode display disappears when Fader ends).
· Effects
: Effects are sustained until this function is turned off.
· Multi-screen : A number of images, equal to the number of screen windows, are captured and
displayed manually or each time a fixed time passes. The display remains until
this function is turned off.
Audio synchronized Fader
6-9-1 Fader
Fade time
6-9-2 Effects
As in Photo mode, Auto Fade (Japanese models: White Fade; overseas models: Black Fade),
Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
Approx. 4 seconds
As in Photo mode, Art, Black and White, Sepia,Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
(Black and White only in card recording mode)
The effects function is toggled ON/OFF by pressing the D. Effect button.
6-9-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens
Operating modes
6-9-4 Card mix
6-9-5 Availability in operation modes
4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Manual, Fast (every 4 frames), Normal (every 6 frames), Slow (every 8 frames)
Cannot be used.
Playback (VCR/tape)
Card playback (VCR/card
(ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only))
Fader
×
Effects
×
Multi-screen
×
Card Mix
(ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
×
×
1-21
6-10 Direct print (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
After connecting the camcorder to the BJ 535PD or BJ 895PD camera direct printer using the
DIF-100 direct interface cable supplied with the printer, the user can easily print out still images
stored on a memory card. Compatible with DPOF printer settings (image and number of copies).
6-10-1 Printable images
On the ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A, still image files stored on an SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard only.
6-10-2 Print format
Single-image printing. Printing of index sheets is not supported. Supported paper sizes are L,
LL, postcard, A4, and card. Refer to the specifications of the BJ 535PD or BJ 895 PD printer for
information on compatible paper sizes.
6-10-3 Trimming
Not supported.
6-10-4 Date stamp
Not supported.
6-10-5 Number of copies printed
Can be specified between 1 and 99.
6-11 Other functions
6-11-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does
not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed.
6-11-2 Automatic stop function
This function is activated in the following cases:
· When forward still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes, or reverse still image
playback is continued for approx. 5minutes
· When a condensation warning is displayed
· When the tape end or beginning is reached
6-11-3 Automatic power-off mechanism
Camera tape mode
After recording has been paused continuously for approximately 5 minutes. When the battery
voltage drops below the specified value.
Camera card mode
After a period of approximately 5 minutes elapses with the card inserted. When the battery
voltage drops below the specified value.
6-11-4 Time code
Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:29
(hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
6-11-5 Photo search
This function searches for images shot in Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (use the
,
keys on the remote control after selecting Photo
6-11-6 Date search
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the ± 10th photo from the current position.
If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date
changes.
Forward/reverse date search (use the
6-11-7 World clock display
,
keys on the remote control after selecting Date
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the ± 10th photo from the current position.
After setting a reference city (the city where the clock's time is set), when you take a picture,
select the name of the city where you are shooting. The date and time will be automatically
changed to the local date and time, and recorded in the data code.
6-11-8 Speaker
Built-in speaker. with volume adjustment
6-11-9 File transfer (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
When the USB port on the PC and the USB port on the camcorder are connected using the
included interface cable (IFC-300PCU), still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion
JPEG files) recorded on the memory card can be transferred to the PC.
If the "ZoomBrowser" program (for Windows) or "ImageBrowser" program (for Macintosh) on
the included Digital Video Solution Disk is installed on the PC in advance, you can transfer the
desired images to the PC while viewing thumbnails of the still images recorded on the memory
card.
6-11-10 A/D conversion
This function performs real-time conversion of analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into
digital DV signals and outputs them through the DV terminal.
When an 8 mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using an AV
cable, and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, playback images can be transferred from the 8 mm tape or VHS tape to the PC. (Under the VCR settings on the VCR menu
screen, set "AV input → DV Output" to ON.
1-22
6-11-11 Playback zoom
When viewing images recorded on tape or card (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only,still images
only), moving the Zoom lever to the Telephoto side causes the image being displayed to appear
at 2x magnification. Moving the Zoom lever back to the Wide side causes the image to be
displayed at its original (unmagnified) size.
When viewing an enlarged image, the Multi-dial can be used to change the portion of the image
that is displayed. (In LCD monitor, a frame indicating the magnified portion is displayed along
with
and
indications showing the directions in which movement is possible using the
Multi-dial.) To toggle between up-down and left-right movement, the user presses the Multidial. (The default setting when switching to 2x magnification is left-right movement.)
⇒
6-11-12 Battery charge function
Charging time
(with power supply switch OFF)
7 Terminals and ports
7-1 DV terminal
7-2 S-video terminal
7-3 AV (Video/audio) terminal
7-4 External microphone input terminal
7-5 Headphone terminal
7-6 Memory card connection terminal
7-7 Battery terminal
7-8 DC IN terminal
7-9 USB port
8 Power supply
8-1 Input power
8-2 Power consumption
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
9 Dimensions (W × H × D)
10 Weight
10-1 Camcorder alone
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
10-2 Total equipped weight ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
By connecting to Canon compact power adapter CA-570, the battery pack installed at the battery
pack installing section can be charged. (When charging is performed, the charge lamp flashes (1flash for the charged amount ranged from 0% to approx. 75%; 2-flash for the charged amount
ranged from 75% to 95%) or lights up (at full charge, that is, 95% or more.)
BP-508: Approx. 110 min., BP-511/512: Approx. 120 min.,
BP-522: Approx. 210 min., BP-535: Approx. 310 min.
Special 4-pin connector (IEEE1394 compatible); input and output
4-pin mini-DIN, input and output
φ 3.5mm, 4-pole pin jack (yellow); input and output
also serves as headphone terminal
φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack
φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (also serves as AV terminal)
Special multi-pin (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Special 3-pin
φ 3.4mm jack
5-pin (mini-B Receptacle; ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN).
During shooting : Approx. 2.9 W (using CVF); approx. 3.8 W (using LCD monitor)
During playback : Approx. 4.2 W (using LCD monitor)
Approx. 58 × 103 × 147 mm (approx. 2.3 in × 4.1 × 5.8 in) (excluding small projections)
Approx. 525 g (approx. 1.2 lb)
Approx. 625 g (approx. 1.4 lb) *1
*1 : (including BP-512, DVM-E30, lens cap, coin-type lithium battery, SDC-8M, grip belt)
*2 : (including BP-508, DVM-E30, lens cap, coin-type lithium battery, SDC-8M, grip belt)
*3 : (including BP-508, DVM-E30, lens cap, coin-type lithium battery, grip belt)
11 Temperature and humidity requirements
11-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance
0°C to 40°C, maximum 85% relative humidity
11-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation
−5°C to 45°C, maximum 65% relative humidity
1-23
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)
WS-20 Wrist Strap
ZR70 MC
SS-800 Shoulder Strap
WA-30.5Wide
Attachment
ZR70 MC ZR65 MC
WD-30.5Wideconverter
WL-D79 Wireless
Controller
ZR60 WL-D80
Wireless Controller
BP-500 Series
Battery Pack
CG-570
Battery Charger
CB-570
Car Battery Cable
MiniDV
Video
Cassette
TL-30.5Teleconverter
CA-570 Compact
Power Adapter
FS-30.5U
Filter Set
BP-500 Series
Battery Pack
S-150 S-video Cable
ZR70 MC VL-3 Video Light
TV
STV-250N
StereoVideo Cable
VCR
ZR70 MC DM-50 Directional
Stereo Microphone
Commercially available
DV Cable
Digital Device
ZR70 MC ZR65 MC
PC Card Adapter
BP-900 Series
Battery Pack*
VL-10Li
Battery
Video Light
Stereo Microphone
(commercially
available)
SD Memory Card
USB Reader/Writer
FD Adapter
MultiMediaCard
IFC-300PCU
USB Cable
Computer
Bubble Jet Printer
with direct print
function
SC-1000 Soft
Carrying Case
SC-A50 Soft
Carrying Case
Fig. 1-2
1-24
5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays
5-1 Camera Mode
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Camera mode
Zoom display
(displayed for approx.
four seconds after zooming)
Optical zooming
W
T
88 × digital zooming
W
440 × digital zooming
W
Zooming stopped
W
T
Zoominging to tele end
W
T
Zoominging to wide end
W
T
T
For ZR65 MC A at 80× and ZR60 A at 72×
T
For ZR65 MC A at 400× and ZR60 A at 360×
Image stabilizer display
The image stabilizer is ON
The image stabilizer is OFF
No display
Recording mode display
SD mode
During SP recording
During LP recording
Operation mode display
During mirror shooting mirror mode (LCD)
Recording
Red display
Record pause
Green display
Playback is stopped
Green display
Cassette is ejected
Green display
+ REC search
Green display
− REC search
Green display
1-25
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Program AE mode display
Full Auto mode is selected
Auto mode is selected
Sports mode is selected
Portrait mode is selected
Spotlight mode is selected
Surf & snow mode is selected
Low light mode is selected
Night mode is selected
Super Night mode is selected
ZR70 MC A only
Program AE mode menu
Super Night mode is for ZR70 MC A only.
Tape counter display
Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory
M
M
M
Not entered
M
AE shift display
Minimum exposure value
When standard value is set
Maximum exposure value
During AE
No display
1-26
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Timer display
Remaining tape display
At end of tape
Not entered
Tape warning display
Other
Flashes red
No display
Focus mode display
AF OFF
Infinity focus
AF ON
No display
Self timer display
Self timer standby
Timer operating
Other
No display
Battery power display
Approx. 75% remaining.
Approx.
Power adapter is connected
No display
1-27
0% remaining. Flashes red
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Shutter speed display
1/60 sec.
1/100 sec.
1/250 sec.
1/500 sec.
1/1000 sec.
1/2000 sec.
Auto
No display
White balance display
Set
Indoor preset
Outdoor preset
Auto
No display
Condensation warning display
Remote sensor code display
Code 1 setting
Code 2 setting
Sensor OFF
Headphone volume adjustment display
Volume OFF
Card mix display
(For ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
1-28
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Digital feature display
Fade Tigger
Wipe (horizontal)
Corner Wipe
Jump
Flip
Puzzle
Zigzag
Beam
Tide
Art
Black and White
Sepia
Mosaic
Ball
Cube
Wave
Color Mask
Mirror
Multi-screen
Feature OFF
No display
Digital feature menu
1-29
REMARKS
Digital Feature selection
Press the “D.E. SEL” button in Camera mode, VCR mode, or Card Recording mode.
The line where the cursor is located in the menu is surrounded with a turquoise frame.
The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.
OFF
In Fader Selection
In Effect Selection
In Multi Screen Selection
In Multi Screen Speed Selection
In Multi Screen Count Selection
1-30
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Wind screen display
Wind screen ON
Wind screen OFF
ON
No display
Time and date display
When time and date are not set
Audio mode display
16-bit is selected
12-bit is selected
16 : 9 mode display
16:9 mode is selected
Other
No display
Half-press lock display
Photo mode display
Normal recording
No display
Photo mode is selected
1-31
REMARKS
5-2 VCR Mode
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
VCR mode
Audio output display
12-bit Stereo 1 is selected
12-bit Stereo 2 is selected
12-bit Mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit Mix variable is selected
16-bit
No display
Audio Mix Balance display
ST-1:ST-2 = 1:0
ST-1:ST-2 = 1:1
ST-1:ST-2 = 0:1
Recording mode display
During SP recording
During LP recording
Operating mode display
During Recording
Red display
During Recording pause
Cassette is ejected
Playback is stopped
Playback
Fast-forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast-forward playback
2× SP playback
1× SP playback
Slow playback
Frame advance playback
1-32
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Still image playback
Reverse still image playback
Frame reverse playback
Slow reverse playback
1× SP reverse playback
2× SP reverse playback
Rewind playback
Forward edit search
Reverse edit search
Forward date/photo search
Reverse date/photo search
FF return
REW return
AV insert pause
AV insert recording
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing recording
Red display
Tape counter
Time code display
Not entered
Zero set memory
Same as during Camera mode
Remaining tape display
Audio dubbing/insert or
search operation display
AV insert is selected
Audio dubbing is selected
Date search operation
Still image photo search operation
Other than search
No display
1-33
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Battery warning display
REMARKS
Speaker volume adjustment display
Volume OFF
Headphone volume adjustment display
Data code display
Date and time selection
Date and time
Data code setting
Camera data Date and time & camera data
Date
setting
Time
setting
Date &
time
setting
Camera data
F-number display
F-number closed
This product has no F-number full-close
When not entered
function.
The shutter speed of this product ranges
from 1/8, 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
When not entered
1-34
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Time display
Time setting is selected
Not entered
Time and time setting are selected
Not entered
Date display
Not entered
Wind screen display
Audio data display
Audio dubbing/audio input terminal
Audio dubbing/micro-phone
input terminal
Audio mode display
16 : 9 mode display
DV display
During DV input
AV input → DV signal conversion
Other
No display
1-35
REMARKS
5-3 Card/Camera Mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Card / Camera mode
Zoom display
Card recording image quality display
Program AE mode display
Full Auto mode
Auto mode
Sports mode
Portrait mode
Spotlight mode
Surf & snow mode
Low light mode
Low light + mode
ZR70 MC A only
Stitch assist number of
photos display
Card access display
1-36
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Card free space display
No card (flashes red)
Accidental erasure protection
9999 or more images can be recorded
99 images can be recorded
displayed green for 6 or more images
displayed yellow for 1 to 5 images
displayed red for 0 images
AE shift display
Card motion video recording time display
320 × 240 pixels
160 × 120 pixels
Still image size display
1024 × 768 pixels
640 × 480 pixels
Motion video size display
×
(ZR70 MC A only)
160 × 120 pixels
Focus mode display
Self timer display
Lithium battery low-power warning display Same as during Camera mode
White balance display
Battery low-power warning display
1-37
MENU INDICATION
Digital feature display
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
(but with no fader function)
Time and date display
(Date and time only)
Half-press lock display
1-38
REMARKS
5-4 Card Playback Mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Card play mode
Slideshow display
DPOP designation display
Protect mark display
DCF file name display
Directory Number-File Number
Card access display
Writting to card
Shown in red, displayed in sequence
Reading from card
Shown in green, displayed in sequence
1-39
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
REMARKS
Image number display
No card
Flashes red
Checking number of images
recorded on card
0 recorded images
9th of 99 recorded images
Image size display
Volume display (ZR70 MC A only)
Same as during VCR mode
Data code display
Same as during VCR mode
(Date and time only)
Slideshow operation guidance display
During slideshow execution
1-40
During moving image playback
5-5 Menu Display
Camera mode, VCR mode, Card/Camera mode, and Card Playback mode are provided in the menu display.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM
CARD MIX *1
CAM. SET UP
SUB MENU ITEM
SHUTTER
IMAGE S.
16 : 9
WHIT BAL.
RETURN
REC MODE
AV/PHONES
AUD. SET UP
RETURN
WIND SCREEN
AUDIO MODE
DISP. SET UP
DEFAULT
BACKUP
Go to Card mix selection screen
D. ZOOM
VCR SET UP
SETTINGS
AUTO
1/60
1/100
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
OFF
88× / 80× / 72×
440× / 400× / 360×
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
AUTO
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
AUTO
Lithium battery
88× / 80× / 72×
Lithium battery
ON
Lithium battery
OFF
Lithium battery
AUTO
Lithium battery
SP
LP
AV
PHONES
SP
Lithium battery
AV
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
16 bit
12 bit
ON
Lithium battery
12 bit
Lithium battery
RETURN
BRIGHTNESS *2
LCD MIRROR *2
TV SCREEN
D/T DISPLAY *2
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-41
ON
Lithium battery
ON
Lithium battery
OFF
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
SUB MENU ITEM
DISP. SET UP
DEMO MODE
SYSTEM
RETURN
BUTTON LIGHT *3
LIGHT COLOR *3
SETTINGS
DEFAULT
ON
OFF
OFF
Lithium battery
ON
PUSH ON
OFF
GREEN
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
ON
Lithium battery
TURQUOISE
Lithium battery
WL REMOTE *4
BEEP *2
T. ZONE/DST *4
D/TIME SEL *4
BACKUP
Lithium battery
OFF
ON
OFF
LONDON
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
DEC.31, 2030
11:59 PM
RETURN
1-42
ON
Lithium battery
N.Y.
Lithium battery
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
MY CAMERA
SUB MENU ITEM
SHTR SOUND
S-UP SOUND
S/STOP SOUND
SELF-T SOUND
SETTINGS
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
DEFAULT
BACKUP
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
*1 :
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model only.
*2 :
BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR, and D/T DISPLAY information is not displayed on screens other than the menu
screen.
*3 :
*4 :
ZR70 MC A model only.
On screens other than the menu screen, displayed for 4 seconds at power-on and when the menu is closed. Note that
this applies to the D/TIME SEL only when OFF is selected for D/T DISPLAY. Also, WL. REMOTE “OFF (
displayed at all times.
1-43
)” is
VCR Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM
VCR SET UP
SUB MENU ITEM
REC MODE
AV/PHONES
AV
AUD. SET UP
DV OUT
RETURN
OUTPUT CH *1
AUDIO MODE
12 bit AUDIO OUT
SETTINGS
DEFAULT
SP
LP
AV
PHONES
ON
OFF
SP
Lithium battery
AV
Lithium battery
OFF
Reset when power is
turned off
L/R
L/L
R/R
16bit
12bit
STEREO 1
STEREO 2
MIX/FIXED
MIX/VARI.
L/R
Reset when power is
turned off
12bit
Lithium battery
STEREO 1
Reset when power is
turned off
MIX BALANCE
AUDIO DUB.
WIND SCREEN
CARD SET UP *2
RETURN
SI QUALITY
MOVIE SIZE
IMAGE NOS.
CARD OPER. *2
DISP. SET UP
RETURN
COPY [
]
]
RETURN
BRIGHTNESS *1
DISPLAYS
6 SEC. DATE *1
DATA CODE *3
D/TIME SEL *3
BACKUP
Lithium battery
AUDIO IN
MIC. IN
ON
OFF
AUDIO IN
Lithium battery
ON
Lithium battery
SUPER FINE
FINE
NORMAL
320 × 240
160 × 120
RESET
CONTINUOUS
FINE
Lithium battery
320 × 240
Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
Lithium battery
Go to Copy execution screen
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DATE/TIME
CAMERA DATA
CAM. & D/T
DATE
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
1-44
ON
Lithium battery
OFF
Lithium battery
DATE/TIME
Lithium battery
DATE & TIME
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
SYSTEM
SUB MENU ITEM
BUTTON LIGHT *4
LIGHT COLOR *4
SETTINGS
ON
PUSH ON
OFF
GREEN
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
DEFAULT
ON
Lithium battery
GREEN
Lithium battery
WL REMOTE *2
BEEP *1
T. ZONE/DST *5
D/TIME SEL *5
BACKUP
Lithium battery
OFF
ON
OFF
LONDON
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
DEC.31, 2030
11:59 PM
RETURN
1-45
ON
Lithium battery
N.Y.
Lithium battery
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
MY CAMERA
SUB MENU ITEM
SHTR SOUND
S-UP SOUND
S/STOP SOUND
SELF-T SOUND
SETTINGS
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
DEFAULT
BACKUP
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
*1 :
BRIGHTNESS, 6 SEC. DATE, OUTPUT CH, and BEEP information is not displayed on screens other than the menu
*2 :
screen.
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model only.
*3 :
*4 :
Displayed only when DATA CODE is ON on screens other than the menu screen.
*5 :
this applies to the D/TIME SEL only when OFF is selected for D/T DISPLAY.
1-46
Card Camera Mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
MAIN MENU ITEM
CAM. SET UP
SUB MENU ITEM
SHUTTER
WHIT BAL
CARD SET UP
RETURN
SI QUALITY
SI SIZE
MOVIE SIZE
FILE NOS. *1
VCR SET UP
RETURN
AV/PHONES
AUD. SET UP
RETURN
WIND SCREEN
DISP. SET UP
RETURN
BRIGHTNESS *2
LCD MIRROR *2
TV SCREEN
D/T DISPLAY *2
DEMO MODE
SYSTEM
RETURN
BUTTON LIGHT *3
LIGHT COLOR *3
SETTINGS
AUTO
1/60
1/100
1/250
AUTO
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
DEFAULT
AUTO
Lithium battery
AUTO
Lithium battery
FINE
Lithium battery
1024 × 768
Lithium battery
320 × 240
Lithium battery
CONTINUOS
Lithium battery
AV
PHONES
AV
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
ON
Lithium battery
SUPER FINE
FINE
NORMAL
1024 × 768
640 × 480
320 × 240
160 × 120
RESET
CONTINUOS
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PUSH ON
OFF
GREEN
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
ON
Lithium battery
ON
Lithium battery
OFF
Lithium battery
OFF
Lithium battery
ON
Lithium battery
BLUE
Lithium battery
WL REMOTE *2
BEEP *2
BACKUP
Lithium battery
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1-47
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
SYSTEM
SUB MENU ITEM
T. ZONE/DST *2
D/TIME SEL *2
SETTINGS
LONDON
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
DEFAULT
BACKUP
N.Y.
Lithium battery
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
LITHIUM BATTERY
PATTERN1
LITHIUM BATTERY
PATTERN1
LITHIUM BATTERY
PATTERN1
LITHIUM BATTERY
DEC.31, 2030
11:59 PM
MY CAMERA
RETURN
SHTR SOUND
S-UP SOUND
S/STOP SOUND
SELF-T SOUND
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
*1 :
BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR, D/T DISPLAY, FILE NOS., and SHTR SOUND information is not displayed on screens
other than the menu screen.
*2 :
this applies to the D/TIME SEL only when OFF is selected for D/T DISPLAY. Also, WL. REMOTE “OFF (
displayed at all times.
*3 :
1-48
)” is
Card Playback Mode (Card/VCR Mode) (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
MAIN MENU ITEM
CARD OPER.
(Single screen)
CARD OPER.
(Index screen)
SUB MENU ITEM
COPY [
]
DEFAULT
Go to the Image erase screen
FORMAT
Go to the Format screen
RETURN
PROTECT
RETURN
REC MODE
AV/PHONES
BACKUP
Go to the Copy execution screen
PRINT ORDERS
ALL ERASE
IMAGE ERASE
PRINT ORDER
VCR SET UP
SETTINGS
Go to the Print oders allerase screen
Go to Image Protect
Go to Print order
SP
LP
AV
PHONES
screen
screen
SP
Lithium battery
AV
Reset when power is
turned off
RETURN
DISP. SET UP
BRIGHTNESS *1
DISPLAY
D/TIME SEL *2
SYSTEM
RETURN
BUTTON LIGHT *3
LIGHT COLOR *3
Lithium battery
ON
OFF
DATE
TIME
DATE & TIME
ON
Lithium battery
DATE & TIME
Lithium battery
ON
PUSH ON
OFF
GREEN
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
ON
Lithium battery
YELLOW
Lithium battery
WL REMOTE *1
BEEP *2
Lithium battery
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1-49
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
SYSTEM
SUB MENU ITEM
T. ZONE/DST *4
D/TIME SEL *4
SETTINGS
LONDON
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
DEC.31, 2030
11:59 PM
PRINT ORDER *5
RETURN
Go to the Print order screen
1-50
DEFAULT
BACKUP
N.Y.
Lithium battery
JAN. 1, 2003
12:00 AM
Lithium battery
MAIN MENU ITEM
MY CAMERA
SUB MENU ITEM
SETTINGS
DEFAULT
CREATE START-UP
Go to the Startup screen creation screen
SEL. S-UP IMG
NO PICTURE
CANON LOGO
MY PICTURE
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
SHTR SOUND
S-UP SOUND
S/STOP SOUND
SELF-T SOUND
BACKUP
CANON LOGO
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
PATTERN1
Lithium battery
RETURN
RETURN
*1:
BRIGHTNESS and BEEP information is not displayed on screens other than the menu screen.
*2:
*3:
Displayed only when DATA CODE is ON on screens other than the menu screen.
*4:
*5:
On screens other than the menu screen, displayed for 4 seconds at power-on and when the menu is closed.
Displayed only when connected to a camera direct printer. Note that this applies to the D/TIME SEL only when OFF
is selected for D/T DISPLAY.
1-51
5-6 Card-Related Screen Displays
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Slideshow screen
Index screen
Image protect screen
Print order screen
1-52
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Copy screen
Copy (
) selection screen
Copy (
) execution screen
Copy (
) selection screen
Copy (
) execution screen
1-53
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Image erase screen
Image erase selection screen
Erasing one image
Warning: Erasing in progress
Erasing all images
1-54
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Format screen
Format execution confirmation screen
Format execution screen
1-55
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Card mix selection screen
Mix type setting screen
Animation type setting screen
Mix level setting screen
1-56
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Stitch assist screen
My camera settings
My camera settings screen
Startup image creation screen
Select recording position
1-57
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
My camera settings
Record execution confirmation
Message during image creation
Startup image selection screen
Shutter sound selection screen
Startup sound selection screen
1-58
REMARKS
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
My camera settings
Start/stop selection screen
Self-timer sound selection screen
PC connection screen displays
USB connection
IEEE1394 connection
1-59
REMARKS
5-7 Direct Print Setting Screen
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Direct print setting screen
Direct print setting initial screen
Print selection screen
L Size
Borderless
Style
L Size
Borderless
SET
Now printing (1/1)
1
Copies
Print
Cancel
Print stop screen
L Size
Borderless
Now printing (1/3)
Cancel
SET
L Size
Borderless
L Size
Borderless
SET
Two sheets remain.
Cancel ?
Two sheets remain.
Cancel ?
OK
OK
Cancel
Cancel
SET
Cancel selection screen
L Size
Borderless
Style
1
OK
SET
Copies
Cancel
Direct Print Cancel
1-60
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Number of copies setting screen
L Size
Bordered
Style
1
Print
Copies
Cancel
SW
L Size
Bordered
L Size
Bordered
Style
Style
Setting
Print
1
Copies
Cancel
Setting
2
Print
Copies
Cancel
SET
(Quantity set by Multi switch)
L Size
Bordered
Style
2
Print
1-61
Copies
Cancel
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
Style setting screen
L Size
Borderless
Style
1
Copies
Print
Cancel
Go to the style setting
screen using MENU buttons
SET
Style
Style
Paper Setting
Borders
SELECT
Borderless
L Size
MENU
MENU
SET
SET
Style
Style
Borders
Paper Setting
L Size
Borderless
MENU
MENU
SELECT
SELECT
Style
Style
Borders
Paper Setting
LL Size
Bordered
MENU
MENU
MENU
L Size
Borderless
Style
1
Print
1-62
Copies
Cancel
5-8 Print
MENU INDICATION
NORTH AMERICA MODEL
OK screen
SET
L Size
Borderless
9999
Style
SET
Print all marketed images
OK
Resume
L Size
Borderless
9999
Now Printing (1/9999)
Cancel
Cancel
Print stop screen
L Size
Borderless
9999
L Size
Borderless
9999
SET
Cancel ?
Cancel
OK
Cancel
SET
Set-print Mode cancel.
Print restart screen
9999
L Size
Borderless
Style
9999
SET
Print remaining Images.
OK
Resume
L Size
Borderless
Cancel
Cancel
Style setting screen
9999
L Size
Borderless
Style
Style is changed.
OK
Resume
9999
L Size
Borderless
SET
Style is changed.
Cancel
OK
Resume
Cancel
Go to the style
setting screen
1-63
5-9 Warning Displays
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED
• When copy-protected tape is played.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED
• When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output from the television or
VCR is garbled during analog input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME
• When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE
• When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
CHECK THE DV INPUT
• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in a condition where the
connected DV input cannot be recognized.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK
• When the battery power is low.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED
• When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a “REMOVE THE CASSETTE” message appears).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION
• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention. In
Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted, if the
cassette is set for erasure prevention.
TAPE END
• When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed in a mode that allows
transition to forward driving during the detection process.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]
• When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP/ESP/ELP; or when LP mode is
detected during Audio Dubbing or AV Insert.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]
• When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording; or when 16-bit
mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]
• When a blank tape area is detected during Audio Dubbing or AV Insert.
1-64
CARD ERROR
• When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
CARD FULL
• When the card is full (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
NAMING ERROR
• When the maximum number of file numbers and directory numbers are created (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
• When an attempt is made to play an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or an image with corrupt data
(for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
PRINT ORDER ERROR
• When there are too many print marks ( 201 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited
(for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
NO CARD
• When there is no card in the camcorder socket (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
NO IMAGES
• When there are no images to be played in the card (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION
• When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows card recording (VCR mode,
Card Recording mode) (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
NOW CREATING START-UP IMAGE
• The startup image is being written to flash memory (for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A model).
CARD MODE
• When Start/Stop button is pressed in the Camera mode (for ZR65 MC A model).
** A warning (warning text) is displayed for approx. four seconds in the center of the screen when an abnormality, etc. occurs.
** While the warning (warning text) is displayed, only actions enabling a mode transition are accepted. The warning display disappears simultaneous with the acceptance of such an action.
1-65
6. Backing Up Various Data
6-1 Backup by Main Power Supply
The condensation timer is backed up by the main power supply alone.
6-2 Backup by Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Lithium Coin Primary Battery)
The table below lists the item (excluding menu items) backed up by the main power supply or backup power supply (lithium coin
primary battery).
Item
Default
Digital zoom position
Optical tele end
WB data (SET)
----
Time and date settings (auto date)
2003. 1.1 12:00 AM
Menu cursor position
Very top
Time code
----
Mix balance (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Center
Headphone volume
Center
Speaker volume
Center
Mechanical errors
----
1-66
Remarks
6-3 Backup Conditions Related to Switch Operation
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power
When Camera mode is in “
In
(Program AE)” mode.
(Full Auto) mode, after the power is turned on (Camera), the specifications are the same as in 6-3-3 (Switching to “Full
Auto”).
Item
Power switch OFF, VCR
● Camera mode, Card/Camera mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
Program AE mode type
Backup
Manual focus ON/OFF
Backup
AE shift setting mode ON/OFF
Backup
DE, DF ON/OFF
Reset (set to OFF)
Headphone volume *CAM
Backup
Self timer ON/OFF
Backup (set to OFF)
On-screen ON/OFF
Backup
Zero Set Memory counter value *CAM
Backup
● Camera, Card/Camera (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A) menu item settings
Digital Effects selection
Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM
Backup *Independent
Effects
Backup *Independent
Multi-screen (speed)
Backup *Independent
Multi-screen (number of screens)
Backup *Independent
Mix key selection in Card Mix
Backup
*CAM (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Mix level in Card Mix
Backup
Shutter speed setting
Backup
Digital zoom setting
Backup *Independent
Image stabilizer ON/OFF
Backup
16:9 ON/OFF
Backup
White balance setting
Backup
Remote control code setting
Backup
Recording mode setting *CAM
Backup
Confirmation beep ON/OFF
Backup
Wind screen ON/OFF
Backup
Audio mode setting *CAM
Backup
AV/headphone selection
Backup
LCD brightness adjustment
Backup
Mirror shooting setting
Backup
On-screen ON/OFF
Backup
Backup
Area/daylight saving time setting
Backup
Time and Date setting
Backup
Image quality *CD (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
Backup
Number reset *CD (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
Backup
* CAM
: Camera mode only
*CD : Card Recording mode only (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
* Independent : Independent backup for Card/Camera mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
The card recording still image selection in Card Mix (Card Mix standby state) is not backed up when the power is turned off.
1-67
6-3-2 Switching the Power Switch to a Different Position
Item
Power switch OFF
● VCR mode
Headphone volume
Backup
Speaker volume
On-screen ON/OFF
Backup
Reset (set to OFF)
Zero Set Memory counter value
Backup
Data code display ON/OFF
Backup
Audio 12-bit output selection
Reset (set to "Stereo 1")
Mix balance setting
Photo Search/Date Search for search selection
Backup
Reset (changes to "Photo Search")
● VCR menu item settings
D. Effects selection
Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM
Backup *Independent
Effects
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup
Recording mode setting
Backup
Data code setting
Backup
Time and date selection setting
Backup
Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF
Backup
Date Auto display ON/OFF
Backup
Bilingual setting
Reset (set to "Main + Sub")
Audio dubbing input setting
Backup
Wind screen ON/OFF
Backup
LINE IN audio mode setting
Backup
Reset (set to “AV”)
Confirmation beep ON/OFF
Backup
Image quality (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Backup
Number reset (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Backup
● Card Playback mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
On screen ON/OFF
Reset (set to OFF)
Data code display ON/OFF
Reset (set to OFF)
● Card Playback mode menu item selection (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Backup
Recording mode setting
Backup
Data code setting
Backup
Backup
Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF
Backup
Date Auto display ON/OFF
Backup
Confirmation beep
Backup
* Independent : Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
1-68
6-3-3 Switching Camera Modes/Switching Program AE Modes
The following table presents the backup state performed for various data when the
AE) to
(Full Auto), or when the
/
switch is set to
Item
/
switch is switched from
(Program
and the mode is switched to a different Program AE mode.
Switched to
(Full Auto)
Switched to Program AE mode
● Camera mode, Card/Camera mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Program AE mode type
Auto focus ON/OFF
AE shift setting mode ON/OFF
DE, DF ON/OFF
*1
----
Reset (set to “ON”)
Backup
Reset (set to “OFF”) *2
Reset (set to OFF)
Reset (set to “OFF”)
Backup
Headphone volume
Backup
Backup
Self timer ON/OFF
Backup
Backup
On screen ON/OFF
Backup
Backup
Zero Set Memory counter value *CAM
Backup
Backup
D. Effects selection
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Effects
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup *Independent
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Reset
Backup
Reset (set to “Auto”)
Backup
Backup
Reset (set to “ON”)
Backup
● Camera/Card mode (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A) menu item settings
Mix selection in Card Mix
Mix level in Card Mix
Card recording image selection in Card Mix
(Card Mix standby state) (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Shutter speed
Digital zoom ON/OFF
Image stabilizer
16:9 *CAM
set to “OFF” *2
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Recording mode setting *CAM
Backup
Backup
White balance
Confirmation beep
Backup
Backup
Wind screen
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Audio mode *CAM
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Mirror shooting setting
Backup
Backup
On screen ON/OFF
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Area/daylight saving time
Backup
Backup
Backup
Backup
Image quality *CD (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Backup
Backup
Number reset *CD (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Backup
Backup
* CAM
:
* Independent :
*1
:
*2
:
Camera mode only
*CD : Card Recording mode only (ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only)
Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
is set again, “Auto” is set.
When
When
is set again, the state preceding the switch to “
” (Full Auto) is restored.
• The card recording still image selection in Card Mix (Card Mix standby state) is not backed up, even if there is a
switch between Normal and Progressive.
• The backup operations at LANC power-OFF and the recording pause 5-minute timer power-OFF are the same as
when the power switch is turned OFF.
1-69
7. Other Features
7-1 Green Mode
Default Settings in Green Mode
• Focus ------------------------- AUTO
• Exposure -------------------- AUTO
• White balance --------------- AUTO
• DE, DF ---------------------- OFF
• Image stabilizer ------------- ON
• Shutter ----------------------- AUTO
• 16:9 -------------------------- OFF
Other settings are the same as before even when the mode is changed to Green mode.
Keys that do not work in the Full Auto mode
• Focus (Auto/Manual) button (forced Auto)
• Exposure (AE/AE Shift) button (forced Auto)
• Multi switch
• Digital effects (ON/OFF) button (forced OFF)
Relationship between Program AE mode (in tape recording) and various shooting functions
Program AE Mode
Item
Recording medium
Forced ON
●
Shutter speed setting
×
●
AE Shift
×
●
Image stabilizer ON/OFF
Forced ON
●
White balance setting
Forced Auto
●
Wind screen ON/OFF
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Digital zoom ON/OFF
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Forced OFF
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
Autofocus ON/OFF
16:9 ON/OFF
Digital fader ON/OFF
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
×
×
●
●
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
●
×
×
×
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Forced OFF Forced OFF Forced OFF
Digital effects ON/OFF
×
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Multi-screen
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
×
×
Photo shooting (recorded to tape)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
Progressive photo shooting
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
×
×
Card mix *
×
●
●
●
●
●
●
×
×
×
* : ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A only
Super Night mode is limited to the ZR70 MC A.
7-2 On Screen
• Turn ON/OFF of the On-screen function is performed through the infrared remote controller or from the menu.
• The default setting is ON in Camera mode, and OFF in VCR mode.
1-70
7-3 Headphones and Speaker
• In Camera mode and Camera/Card mode, the speaker is OFF.
• The speakers are on during normal card playback in the VCR mode. The Multi switch is used to adjust the volume.
• Headphone volume can only be controlled when headphones are selected in the menu. The volume is controlled using the Multi
switch.
• The speaker is OFF when headphones are selected in the menu.
7-4 Battery Indicator, Low-Power Warning, and Low-Power Shutoff
Battery Indicator
• When a battery is used, the battery indicator is displayed at one of five levels (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 0% (approximate)). These
levels indicate the amount of power remaining before the low-power warning indicator appears. The battery indicator is reset
when the power is turned off. Thus if the voltage is restored while the power is off, the battery indicator level may increase when
the power is turned back on. However, if the low-power warning appears, it will still be displayed even if the voltage is restored
when the power is turned on and off.
• When an AC adapter is used, the battery indicator is not displayed. However, the low-power warning is displayed if the voltage
drops below the low-power warning level due to an abnormality. When the voltage is restored above the low-power warning
level, the low-power warning disappears.
• The low-power warning is displayed when the battery terminal voltage falls to approx. 6.3 V or less (for this product).
7-5 System Data Displays
Camera Mode
Data code (timestamp)
Data code (camera data)
Time code
Audio mode (12/16 bit)
Wide/Normal
CGMS (warning)
SP/LP
VCR Mode
PB
Camera Screen
REC Search
DIF Input
Blue Background
×
×
●
×
×
●
× --× F - - - etc.
●
●
●
●
●
4-second display
●
Setting display
×
×
× --× F - - - etc.
●
Main unit
●
DIF side
●
DIF side
●
DIF side
●
Setting display
×
●
×
●
×
●
●
Setting display
●
●
Setting display
×
●
●
(including Superb Playback)
* The time code display reads “-.- -:- -:- -” when no tape is inserted or when the camcorder is at an unrecorded tape position.
* CGMS : If the data is copy-protected, it is not output to LINE OUT or the CVF (panel).
7-6 Data Code Display
Data codes can be used to turn the display ON/OFF independently (i.e., regardless of the ON/OFF status of other On Screen
character displays).
7-7 MP Tape Support
LP recording onto MP tape is not possible. When a tape is loaded with LP selected on the menu, the setting is automatically
switched to SP. During playback, the tape is played in LP if it was recorded in LP.
1-71
7-8 Confirmation Beep
In the following cases, beep melodically.
Mode
Sound
Power ON
PIP
When tape with erase protection is loaded (Camera mode)
BEEP BEEP BEEP
When EJECT cover is opened all the way (even when power is OFF)
PIP PIP
When recording is started (Camera mode)
PIP
When recording is paused (Camera mode)
PIP PIP
When Photo button is half-pressed
PIP PIP
When photo recording starts
PIP
When a condensation or a mechanical error occurs, or five seconds
BEEP (5 times)
before the REC PAUSE(*) five-minute timer ends
When the SET button is pressed on an unavailable menu item
BOOP
10, 15, and 20 seconds before the REC PAUSE (*) five-minute timer ends BIP BIP BIP
Self timer (synchronized with tally blinking)
PIP PIP (8 times at every second)
PIP (8 times at 0.25 second)
REC PAUSE (*) includes REC PAUSE for audio dubbing and AV Insert.
* PIP: 4 kHz, BIP: 2 kHz, BOOP: 1kHz
* The startup shutter, start/stop, and self-timer setting can be changed from the My Camera setting screen.
1-72
7-9 Using Analog Line Recording and DV Recording
(1) Move the power switch to the VCR position and the Tape/Card switch to the TAPE. If a cassette has been inserted it will be stopped.
The terminal (DV, S, AV) are set to output. In addition, the headphone terminal (if that setting is selected from the menu), which
also serves as the AV jack, and the speaker are set to output (the headphone status takes priority).
(2) Connect a cable from a recording source to the S-VIDEO terminal (video signal) and AV terminal (audio signal), or to the AV
terminals (video and audio signals), or to the DV terminal. Power on the recording source.
* If recording is paused while input is being received from terminals other than the DV terminal, the AV jack is
automatically set as the AV input terminal.
If more than one of the above terminals is connected at the same time, the active terminal is selected automatically according to the
following order of priority.
Order of priority : DV terminal > S terminal > AV terminal
Note that when the playback screen is displayed (including Superb Playback), the playback screen takes priority.
(3) Press [REC STANDBY] on the remote control.
Recording is paused. If analog line input is being used, the S terminal and AV terminal are switched to input at this time.
(4) To start recording, press [ / ] on the remote control.
This starts recording of video, audio etc. through the terminal selected in step (2)
(Press [ / ] to toggle between recording and pausing.)
(5) Press [■] to stop recording.
Recording is stopped.
* If DV input disappears during DV recording, then recording is stopped.
* If a recording source is input to the DV terminal during analog line recording, recording is continued without change. When
recording is paused, the input is switched to DV input.
* CGMS (Copy Generation Management System; copy protection) input signal
• Only input signals (CGMS = 00) that are not copy-protected can be recorded.
• If a copy-prohibited input signal (CGMS = 11) or single-copy-allowed input signal (CGMS = 10) is detected during
recording or when recording is paused, then recording is paused.
• Blue background is output to the LCD panel and CVF. The speaker and headphone output is muted.
• Both audio and video CGMSD (Copy Generation Management System for Digital) signals are detected during DV input.
The signal with the stronger copy protection setting is used.
The Following Table Summarizes the Input and Output Statuses in Different Modes.
DV input signal present
No DV input signal
LCD, CVF
DV terminal
S, AV terminals
LCD, CVF
DV terminal
S, AV terminals
Playback screen
OUT
OUT
Playback screen
OUT
OUT
No tape, STOP, FF, REW
DV input screen
IN
OUT
Blue background
OUT
OUT
REC PAUSE, REC
DV input screen
IN
OUT
Line input screen*
IN
IN
Playback
(including Superb Playback)
* : No signal if there is no LINE input.
1-73
7-10 Support for Analog Signal I/O Copyright Protection Signals
(1) Detection of copyright protection signals added to input signals
• Detected copyright protection signals: Pseudo-synch pulses and CGMSA (Copy Generation Management System for analog)
signals
• Signal detection time: 20 seconds maximum
(2) Copyright protection signals added to output signals
• Macrovision (pseudo-synch pulses): Not added
• CGMSA signals: Not added
7-11 Video ID1 Detection/Output Support
(1) S1 signal output
When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the S terminal, an S 1 compatible wide monitor will detect an identification signal for automatically restoring the 16:9 video (e.g., during playback of a
tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or a tape containing system data related to the aspect ratio).
• NTSC → 16:9 Full mode + 4:3 Letter Box mode identification signal output
• PAL → 16:9 Full mode identification signal output
(2) Video ID1 output
• When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the composite video
terminal or S terminal, a video ID 1 /-compatible wide monitor will detect an identification signal for automatically restoring the
16:9 video (e.g., during playback of a tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or a tape containing system data related to the aspect
ratio).
(3) Detection of S1 signal or video ID1 during line input (ID1 is for NTSC models only)
• A video ID 1 /S 1 signal multiplexed onto a video signal input from the composite video terminal or S terminal is detected, and
system data relating to aspect ratio information is recorded.
(4) Detection of WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) signal during line input (iPAL model only)
1-74
7-12 Audio Dubbing
7-12-1 Tapes to which Audio Dubbing can be Added
Audio dubbing can only be added to tapes with 1 2-bit/SP recording (other than 4-channel simultaneous recording). The camcorder
switches to Stop mode if audio dubbing is attempted on other tapes.
The camcorder switches to Stop mode (a warning is displayed) if LP mode is detected, or if any of the following are detected: 1 6bit mode, 4-channel simultaneous recording, no recording, SDL recording.
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source
Select an audio dubbing input source on the VCR menu. (There is no menu on PAL models. The microphone is the only audio
dubbing input source for these models.)
There are two audio dubbing options: “Line (AV terminal)” and “Microphone”. If Microphone is selected and an external microphone is connected, then the external microphone is used as input. If no external microphone is connected, then the built-in
microphone is used as input.
The settings for line video output are as follows.
(1) When AV terminal input is used: The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Input mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(2) When external microphone input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output mode. The speaker is off and line
monitoring is possible.
(3) When built-in microphone input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output.
The speaker is off and line motion is possible.
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Procedure
(1) In VCR mode, play and pause the tape at the position where you want to add audio dubbing. Next, press the [Audio dubbing] button
on the remote control.
The camcorder switches to Audio Dubbing mode (Audio Dubbing pause), and
(Audio Dubbing pause) is displayed on the LCD
panel (CVF).
(2) Push the Pause [ ] button and input the audio through the microphone, etc.
This starts the audio dubbing process.
(3) When you want to stop, press the Stop [■] button.
Audio Dubbing mode ends and the Audio Dubbing display disappears. The camcorder is stopped.
• You can press the Pause [ ] button instead of the Stop [■] button to return to the condition in step (1) (Audio Dubbing pause)
without exiting Audio Dubbing mode.
• Another way to exit Audio Dubbing mode is to press the [Audio Dubbing] button during Audio Dubbing pause.
• If the [Zero Set Memory] button on the remote control is pressed in advance at the tape position where you want audio dubbing
to end, then after step (2), the camcorder will automatically stop at the set position and audio dubbing will end.
7-12-4 CGMS
• A CGMSA signal added to an analog-input video signal cannot be detected while a tape is being played. During audio dubbing,
the yellow video terminal must be disconnected.
• Do not activate Audio Dubbing mode at copy-protected locations on a copy-protected tape. When the tape moves from a
copyable area to a copy-protected area, the camcorder stops.
1-75
7-13 AV Insert (Not available on PAL Models)
In AV Insert mode, an ITI (Insert and Track Information) area is kept and audio, video, and sub-codes are overwritten.
7-13-1 Tapes Allowing AV Insert
Only tapes with SP recording can be used with AV Insert mode. If an attempt is made to enter AV Insert mode with any other type
of tape, the camcorder switches to Stop mode. The camcorder stops (and displays a warning) if LP mode is detected, or if no
recording SDL is detected.
7-13-2 AV Insert Signal Input Source Selection
The input source is selected automatically according to the following order of priority:
DV terminal (ACK detected) > AV terminal detected > No connection
The settings for line video output are as follows.
(1) When DV terminal input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(2) When AV terminal input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Input mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(3) When there is no connection
: The S terminal and AV terminal are OFF. The speaker output is muted.
7-13-3 AV Insert Procedure
(1) In VCR mode, play and pause the tape at the position where you want to insert AV. Next, press the [AV Insert] button on the remote
control. The camcorder switches to AV Insert mode (AV Insert pause), and “ ” (AV Insert pause) is displayed on the LCD panel
(CVF).
(2) Push the Pause [ ] button and input the video and audio.
This starts the AV insertion process. ● (AV Insert) is displayed on the LCD panel (CVF).
(3) When you want to stop, press the Stop [■] button.
AV Insert mode ends and the AV Insert display disappears. The camcorder is stopped.
• You can press the Pause [ ] button instead of the Stop [■] button to return to the condition in step (1) (AV Insert pause) without
exiting AV Insert mode.
• Another way to exit AV Insert mode is to press the [AV Insert] button on the remote control during AV Insert pause.
• If the [Zero Set Memory] button on the remote control is pressed in advance at the tape position where you want AV insertion to
end, then after step (2), the camcorder will automatically stop at the set position and AV insertion will end.
7-13-4 CGMS
• AV insertion for both DV input and analog input is only possible when there is no copy protection (CGMS = 00).
• If a value other than “00” is detected for CGMS, then the camcorder changes to Stop mode.
1-76
7-14 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion
This function can be used as an A/D conversion function for inputting an analog AV signal from an analog device to a PC.
7-14-1 A/D Signal Conversion Pocedure
(1) Connect the output terminal of the analog device with the analog terminal of the camcorder using STV-250N (or using S-1 50 if
necessary). Also connect the DV terminal of the camcorder with the DV terminal on the PC using CV-250F or CV-1 50F.
(2) Move the camcorder's power switch to [VCR] and move the Tape/Card switch to “Tape”, setting the operating mode to Stop mode
without inserting a tape.
(3) Select this function (A/D signal conversion) from the VCR setting item on the menu. Specifically, set “AV input → DV output” to
“ON”.
(4) Open the motion video acquisition software program on the PC and output the analog AV signal from the analog device.
The analog AV signal from the analog device is converted by the camcorder to a digital signal (DV signal). The PC can then acquire
the video and audio from the analog device, making it possible to record motion video and still images as needed.
7-14-2 CGMS
• A/D signal conversion for both DV input and analog input is only possible when there is no copy protection (CGMS = 00).
• If a value other than “00” is detected for CGMS, then the A/D signal conversion function is closed, the LCD panel/CVF changes
to blue background, the audio output is muted, and the following warning message is displayed: “COPYRIGHT PROTECTED
DUBBING RESTRICTED”.
7-15 Multi Switch
VCR operations and various settings can be performed in this mode.
When the Switch is Turned
Multi-switch Mode
Operated Function
When switch is turned upward
During menu selection
Item selection
The cursor moves up.
Menu
During LCD brightness adjustment
The LCD screen grows brighter.
During card mix level adjustment
Mix level adjustment
The mix level range becomes smaller.
(ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
During AE shift
AE level correction
The iris value is increased.
During manual focus
Focus adjustment
The focus moves closer.
During VCR mode
Speaker/headphone volume adjustment
The volume increases.
During playback zoom
Movement of display frame
Frame moves up (to the right).
When Setting Switch is Pushed
Multi switch mode
Shooting pause
Operated function
Open/close Program AE menu
When Setting switch is pushed
Program AE mode selection.
(sets selected settings)
In Digital Effects mode
Digital Effects mode selection switch
Digital Effects mode is selected.
When menu is displayed
Menu item setting switch
The item is selected.
Toggles direction of frame movement
The direction of frame movement is selected.
During playback zoom
(left-right/up-down)
1-77
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B. Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-1
2. Power Supply Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
2-2 Power Fuses ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
2-3 Power Supply Circuits ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
3. Built-in Charger Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
3-1 Outline ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
3-2 Operation at Charging ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-8
3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-8
3-2-2 Progress of Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-9
4. Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-10
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-12
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-13
4-4 Audio Signal Flow ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
5. System Control, Servo ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-16
5-3 Servo Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-17
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-18
5-5 Error Detection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-19
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-19
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-19
1. P.C.B. Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-Control Section
• IC100
• IC200
MODE MI-COM
BACK UP
• IC103
RESET
Camera/Card Section
• IC1101
• IC1102
PM Section
• IC1802
System control
MODE MI-COM resetting
Detects a DC JACK voltage to the MODE MI-COM.
SDRAM
MACS
Memory for MACS (64M)
Camera digital signal processing, and card image processing
OPE AMP
Operational amplifier for charge circuit
• IC3201
• IC3202
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
2.7V REGULATOR
Power PWM regulator controller
2.7V regulator
• IC3203
• IC3204
4.7V REGULATOR
2.5V REGULATOR
4.7V regulator
2.5V regulator
VRP2
Record playback head amplifier
• IC2100
• IC2300
VIF2
FLASH
Analog video input/output signal processing
Memory for FR MI-COM
• IC2301
VIC3
Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface,
FR MI-COM, and USB interface
Video Section
• IC2000
• IC2302
SDRAM
MO Driver Section
• IC300
• IC301
Audio Section
• IC801
OPE AMP
MOTOR DRIVE
Memory for VIC3 (64M)
Operational amplifier for reel sensor
Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver
AUDIO INTERFACE
Analog input/output signal processing
SP DRIVER
4V REGULATOR
Speaker amplifier
4V regulator (for speaker amplifier)
V-DRIVER
CCD V driver
• IC1002
• IC1202
TG/CDS/AGC/AD
IRIS DRIVE
CCD, TG, CCD output signal sampling, AGC, and A/D converter
IRIS driver, and gyro output amp
• IC1701
CVF Section
MOTOR DRIVER
Zoom, focus motor driver
EVF DRIVER
EEPROM
EVF LCD (CVF) drive
EEPROM for CVF data, MODE MI-COM
CCD
CCD image sensor
• IC901
• IC902
EEPROM
SERI/PARA CONVERTER
EEPROM for LCD data
LCD power switchover
• IC903
• IC4201
LCD DRIVE
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
LCD signal processing and drive
Backlight drive
• IC802
• IC803
(2) CAC P.C.B.
Camera Section
• IC1001
• IC1501
• IC1502
(3) CCD P.C.B.
• IC1070
(4) LCD P.C.B.
2-1
(5) CVF P.C.B.
Signal transfer from CAC P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on.
(6) JACK P.C.B.
AV, MIC, S JACK, USB interface, Remoto control signal receiver sensor, white LED.
• IC1601
P SENSOR GYRO
Pitch-direction angular speed detection
• IC1602
Y SENSOR GYRO
Yaw-direction angular speed detection
2-2
2. Power Supply Circuit
<Outline>
In this product, a novel type of power supply system including a compact adapter (CA-570) is adopted for enhancement of cost
performance and power savings.
In comparison with the conventional products, this machine provides the following advantageous features:
• When the DC jack is disconnected from the battery with power turned ON, poser goes OFF once.
• The internal battery is charged only when the MAIN switch is at the P OFF position.
• When the DC jack not connected with power source (not supplied with power) is inserted into the main unit, power is not turned
on even if the battery is mounted. “A changeover of main power to the battery is not made since an event of DC jack mechanism
detection takes precedence.”
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
Card P.C.B.
12
CN4001
MAIN P.C.B.
21
EJ SW
LITHIUM
BATTERY
DMC-III
CASSETTE
IN SW
JACK
CN2101 31
CN100
CN303 12
POWER SW
CN101
9 10
CN3201
DC+
2
DC J SW
3
3
13
EJECT SW 66
3V
REG.
14
E3V
18 E3 DET
CAS IN 67
14
DET
4
SW
12
97
RESET
11
10 RESET
2.6V
DET.
2
25 LI DET
IC102
BACK UP
5
6
VTR
76
POWER SW
CAMERA
77
POWER SW
IC100
MODE
MI-COM.
73 UNREG DET
7
CN3202
BATT+
VCC
71 DC J DET
DVDD 3V
5
62
52 VTR ON
41
IC103
RESET
4
VTR ON
PM SECTION
Fig. 2-1
2-3
SERIAL
DATA
IC2301
FR
MI-COM.
(VIC3)
• Backup Lithium Battery
LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC102, and it is output from pin 12 as power to the MODE microcomputer. Thus, the MODE microcomputer performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected.
When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC102 outputs the “L”
signal form pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE microcomputer sends it to the FR microcomputer,
which then issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.
• Main Power Supply
Main power (DC-JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to pin 13 of IC102. Through the internal regulator in IC102, the main power thus
supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 14 of IC102. Furthermore, through the internal switch, the
main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 12 of IC102 as a power voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM.
Supplied with the main power, IC102 outputs the “L” signal from its pin 4. When the MODE MI-COM receives the “L” signal and
the two signals output from pin 4 of IC103, it recognizes that the power supply is loaded. Then the MODE MI-COM performs
initialization to set up a standby state. In this state, the MODE MI-COM carries out detection of start-related switch signals. Upon
detection of these switch signals, the MODE MI-COM delivers the VTR ON(H) signal from its pins 52. When the VTR ON(H)signal
is output, each circuit power is made active.
When each circuit power is made active, 3V power is input to pins 5/7 of IC102. 3V power is output as the power for the MODE
MI-COM from pin 12 of IC102 to save its power consumption.
2-4
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
CN3201
2
FU3201
UNREG 1
DC +
FU3203
MECHA UNREG
FU3204
DC/DC UNREG
MODE
MI-COM
FU3205
SHOE UNREG
FU3202
* ZR70MC A Only
P5 + VTR UNREG
CN3202
5,6
FU1801
MICOM UNREG
BATT +
Fig. 2-2
The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to six fuses on the MAIN P.C.B., through which the following six power
voltage are delivered.
(1) UNREG 1 : FU3201
• 3V power source (LCD3V, A 3V, HA 3V, DVDD 3V, IRIS 3V, CAM 3V)
• 2.7V power source (SDRAM 2.7V, AVDD 2.7V, DIF 2.7V)
• 2.5V power source (DVDD 2.5V)
• 1.4V power source (DVDD 1.4V, MACS 1.4V, AVDD 1.4V)
• LCD drive power source (-8V, 8.5V, 15V)
• CCD drive power source (-7V, +15V)
(2) P5/VTR UNREG : FU3202
• 4.7V power source (AA 4.7V, VIF 4.7V, HA 4.7V)
• 5V power source (POW 5V, LCD 5V)
• VCR UNREG
(3) MECHA UNREG : FU3203
• DRUM /CAPSTAN
(4) DC/DC UNREG : FU3204
• DC/DC CONVERTER
(5) SHOE UNREG : FU3205
• Accessory shoe power source
(6) MI-COM UNREG : FU1801
• MI-COM UNREG (BATTERY)
2-5
2-3 Power Supply Circuits
Figure 2-3 shows the power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON signals output from the MODE MI-COM.
MAIN P.C.B.
46
PWM
50
CH-1
UNREG
REG.
Q3204
LPF
MACS 1.4V
LPF
AVDD 1.4V
LPF
DVDD 1.4V
IC3204
40
UNREG
REG.
DVDD 2.5V
IC3202
PWM
IC3201
DC/DC
CONVERTER
CONTROL
56
CH-3
REG.
Q3205
37
REG.
UNREG
IC3203
PWM
57
CH-4
REG.
REG.
Q3206
21
LPF
SDRAM 2.7V
LPF
AVDD 2.7V
LPF
DIF 2.7V
LPF
DVDD 3V
LPF
IRIS 3V
LPF
CAM 3V
LPF
LCD 3V
LPF
A 3V
LPF
HA 3V
LPF
AA 4.7V
LPF
VIF 4.7V
LPF
HA 4.7V
UNREG
P 5V
LPF
PWM
60
CH-5
15
PWM
61
CH-6
UNREG
VTR ON
28
62
CAP VM
REG.
Q3208
11
PWM
UNREG
REG.
CH-7
30
5
64
LPF
LCD 15V
LPF
LCD 8.5V
LPF
LCD -10V
LPF
CCD 15V
LPF
CCD -7V
UNREG
31
PWM
LCD 5V
DRUM VM
REG.
Q3207
REG.
CH-8
Fig. 2-3
2-6
3. Built-in Charger Circuit
DC
P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
DC JACK DET
CN3201
DC J SW
2
DC+
1
DC-
IC103
RESET
UNREG DET
JACK
3
73
Q1805
Q1803
Q1804
INIT CHG2
INIT CHG1
DC JACK DET
DC
71
100
87
99
IC100
MODE
MI-COM.
Q1802
CHAGE
A/D I
41
90
89
CN3202
5,6
BATT+
3,4
BATT-
2
BATT INFO AD
1
BATT E3
D
BATT E3
B
Fig. 2-4
3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.
(1) IC100 : MODE MI-COM
• Charging voltage and charging current control
• Detection and display of charging progress
• Error discrimination and display
• Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection
(2) IC 1802 : OPE AMP
• Signal amplification for detecting charging current
(3) Q1802/Q1803 : MOS form FET
• Power supply changeover switch
(4) Q1804/Q1805 : TRANSISTOR
• Trickle charge switch
2-7
88
BATT INFO AD
BATTERY
A/D V
IC1802
BATT AD
3-2 Operation at Charging
3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging
When the following conditions are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM (IC100) to start charging.
Conditions
Detection
Source of detection
Main unit power is turned OFF.
Battery is installed.
MODE MI-COM pin 76/77
MODE MI-COM pin 88
POWER SW
Battery D terminal
DC JACK is inserted.
(BATT INFO AD)
MODE MI-COM pin 71
(CN3202 pin 2)
DC JACK
(CN3201 pin 3)
DC JACK input voltage is 8.4±0.3V.
(DC JACK DET)
MODE MI-COM pin 87
(BATT AD)
MODE MI-COM pin 73
DC JACK
(CN3201 pin 2)
(UNREG DET)
2-8
3-2-2 Progress of Charging
When the conditions described in 3-2-1 are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM starts charging according to the specifications in Fig.2-5.
The charging current in quick charge can be restricted by CA-570.
* Charging is allowed to start provided that the UNREG voltage is 8.4 0.3V before
starting the charging. Otherwise, an error is indicated.
* Charging can be performed provided that the power is turned OFF.
* If the DC JACK is detected, the charging is turned OFF when the power is turned ON
(no power supplied from the battery).
Charging current
LED flashes once
Quick charge 1.525A
LED lights up steadily
Up to battery installed/removed
and power turned ON
LED flashes twice
0.075A
1.1A
ADI detection voltage
= 1.706V
When battery voltage
becomes 6.5V,
quick charge starts.
If the battery is not installed/removed
after completion of charge, charging
does not start unless the battery voltage
becomes 7V or lower.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the battery voltage becomes 6.4V
or lower during charging other than trickles 1 and 2.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the battery voltage becomes 5V
or lower during charging trickle 2.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the charging voltage is 1.8A or higher
(detected voltage > 2.7V).
* Charging is turned OFF if the charging current is 70mA or lower. Specified from D65
BP-Z: 10 min.
BP-2Z: 10 min.
If the battery voltage
BP-3Z: 10 min.
becomes 5.2V,
100mA
the trickle 2 starts.
350mA max.
= 0.155V
Trickle 1
50mA max.
70mA
ADI detection
voltage
= 0.109V
Lapsed time
Charge
ended
TOTAL TIMER
BATT V 5.2V
INIT-CHG1 ON
INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG
OFF
BATT V 6.5V
1.706V
INIT-CHG1 OFF
INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG
ON
BATT V 6.5V
0.155V ADI detection voltage
1.706V
INIT-CHG1 OFF
INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG
ON
Torque 1 timer
110 min. max.
Error indicated and
charging OFF at timeout
Quick charge timer
Error indicated and
2-flash timer
LED lit and charging ended at
timeout
BP-Z : 2Hmax
BP-2Z : 4Hmax
BP-3Z : 5Hmax
BP-Z : 2Hmax
BP-2Z : 4Hmax
BP-3Z : 8Hmax
BATT V 8.0V
0.109V ADI detection voltage
INIT-CHG1 OFF
INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG
ON
5.2V BATT V 6.5V
INIT-CHG1 ON
INIT-CHG2 ON
CHG
OFF
Torque 2 timer
100 min. max.
Error indicated and
BATT V 8.0V
0.109V
INIT-CHG1 OFF
INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG
OFF
Total timer
timeout
Supplementary timer
timeout
BP-Z : 6Hmax
BP-2Z : 9Hmax
BP-3Z : 12Hmax
BP-Z : 1Hmax
BP-2Z : 1Hmax
BP-3Z : 1Hmax
Fig. 2-5
2-9
0.155V
4. Signal Processing Circuit
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Figure 2-6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
CCD P.C.B.
LENS
IC1001
CCD
CAC P.C.B.
IC1002
TG/CDS/AGC/AD
MEMORY
CARD
IC501
EVF DRIVE
CVF
LCD
LCD
P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
IC1101
SDRAM
IC1102
MACS
CARD
P.C.B.
IC2301
VIC3
JACK P.C.B.
MIN AV
JACK
IC903
EVF
DRIVE
IC2303
SDRAM
LCD
IC2100
VIF2
USB
TERMINAL
USB
IC801
AIF3
MIC
DV
TERMINAL
DIF
IC802
SP DRIVE
FR
MICOM
IC2000
VRP2
REC/PB
HEAD
SPEAKER
Fig. 2-6
2-10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing
4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM
IC1101
32 bit
SDRAM IF
CDS/
AGC/
AD/TG
IC1002
CCD
IC1001
proc
36MHz
resize
nr
Deformation,
Drawing
REND
Synthesis
COMP
JPEG
JPEG
CARD IF
Camera signal
processing
GRAB
10bit
18MHz
AIF
IC801
VIC3
IC2301
FR
MI-COM
Audio
IC1102
Fig. 2-7
4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM
IC1101
32 bit
SDRAM IF
RAW
CDS/
AGC/
AD/TG
IC1002
CCD
IC1001
36MHz
10bit
18MHz
proc
YCC 1
resize
FR
MI-COM
DMA
YCC 2
Deformation,
Drawing
REND
nr
Camera signal
processing
GRAB
AIF
IC801
JPEG
Synthesis
COMP
CARD IF
Audio
USB
IC1102
Fig. 2-8
2-11
VIC3
IC2301
SD
CARD
4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM
IC1101
32 bit
SDRAM IF
YCC 1
CDS/
AGC/
AD/TG
IC1002
CCD
IC1001
proc
FR
MI-COM
YCC 2
resize
Deformation,
Drawing
REND
nr
Camera signal
processing
GRAB
10bit
18MHz
36MHz
DMA
AIF
IC801
JPEG
Synthesis
COMP
CARD IF
VIC3
IC2301
SD
CARD
Audio
IC1102
Fig. 2-9
<CCD> IC1001
• 1/6 inches interlaced CCD
• Complementary color filter
• Total number of pixels Approx. 680,000
Effective number of pixels Tape : Approx. 340,000 / Card : Approx. 447,000
<CDS/AGC/AD/TG> IC1002
A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it
is output as a digital signal.
<MACS> IC1102
Various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.) and digital effect processing operation are carried out.
This circuit carries out various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. It also performs
multimedia-application signal processing mainly for still image recording.
• Feature engine
• High-speed card interface
• JPEG
• Audio data compression (ADPCM)
• USB 1.1 function
<SDRAM> IC1101
Field memory for camera signal processing and digital effect processing
Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation
2-12
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing
VIC BLOCK
DIF BLOCK
IC2303
SDRAM
SDRAM
INTERFACE
DIF
INTERFACE
DV
TERMINAL
VIDEO
HEAD
A DATA
IC1102
B DATA
MACS
IC2100
VIF2
VIDEO
INTERFACE
D/A
A/D
COMPRESSION
/DEMOD.
BUS
ECC
REC/PB
PROCESS
IC2000
VRP2
AUDIO
INTERFACE
IC801
AIF3
AV
JACK
AV JACK
S TERMINAL
CVF
LCD
R,G,B
LCD
MI-COM. BLOCK
FR MI-COM.
USB BLOCK
USB INTERFACE
IC2301
VIC3
USB
TERMINAL
Fig. 2-10
< VIC3 >IC2301
• The VIC, MI-COM, DIF INTERFACE and USB INTERFACE circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip.
• A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (MACS digital effect circuit is used
at playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC3 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,
subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC3, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of
• DIF
DV format.
: After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital
input, the data enters VIC3 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000
Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC3 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC3.
< VIF2 >IC2100
Y and C signals sent from VIC3 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC3.
2-13
4-4 Audio Signal Flow
L
MIC
HEAD
PHONE
AV
JACK
EXT
MIC
R
R
L
R
IC2301
VIC3
IC1102
MACS
L
IC801
AIF3
MEM IF
CARD IF
SDRAM
CARD
L
IC2000
VRP2
REC/
PB
HEAD
R
BEEP
FR MI-COM.
L+R
+
−
IC802
SPEAKER
DRIVER
FR
MI-COM.
BEEP
SPEAKER
Fig. 2-11
< AIF >IC801
Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from MODE MI-COM),plus ALC (Auto
Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the signal from the FR
MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF.
The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F circuits are contained in this IC. It is also used for changeover
between ordinary voice sound and beep sound.
< SPEAKER DRIVER >IC802
This integrated circuit is used for speaker drive operation.
2-14
5. System Control, Servo
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo
Figure 2-12 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and MODE MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
MEMORY
CARD
IC3201
DC/DC
CONVERTER
IC1102
MACS
DRUM
D-VS
DRUM
C-VS
M
DRIVER
FG/PG
PWM C
PWM D
CAPSTAN
DFG/PG
VIC
CFG
M
FG
ZOOM SW
IC301
MOTOR
DRIVER
JACK
P.C.B.
LOADING
DRIVER
REMOTE
CONTROL
SIGNAL
RECEIVER
DIAL SW
CAPSTAN
DRIVER
IC2300
FLASH
FR
MI-COM
CARD
P.C.B.
IC2000
VRP2
LOADING
M
DMC III
MODE SW
C.DOWN SW
BOT/EOT
SENS.
DEW
REEL FG
IC2301
VIC3
R-KEY
HEAD
START/STOP
SW
IC2100
VIF2
PHOTO SW
IC801
AIF3
MIC
IC100
MODE
MI-COM
POWER SW
LCD P.C.B.
EJECT SW
IC902
SERI/PARA
CONVERTER
LENS
EEPROM
IC901
EEPROM
IC1501
EVF
DRIVER
IC903
LCD
DRIVER
IC101
IC1701
MOTOR
DRIVER
IC1002
CDS AGC
A/D TG
IC1202
IRIS
DRIVE
Fig. 2-12
2-15
CAC P.C.B.
5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer
(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC3)
The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communication with MODE MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCIII). Following are the major functions.
• VIC (Video) VIF2 (Video Interface) control / AIF3 (Audio Interface) controls / DIF (Digital Interface) controls
• Control in accordance with IEEE1394
• USB interface control
• DMC III mechanism control
• Card control
• CCD drive control
• AE, AF, AWB control
• EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control
• OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control
* The FR microcomputer in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the
FR microcomputer as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and
data modification regarding the FR microcomputer.
(2) MODE MI-COM (IC100)
The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.
• Key input
• LCD / EVF control
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• Built-in charge circuit control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
* In this machine, an EEPROM for the MODE microcomputer is mounted on the CAC P.C.B. instead of the MAIN
P.C.B.
2-16
5-3 Servo Control
Servo control is carried out by the VIC3 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and
rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal
flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.
Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which
is driven on the MAIN P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DC/DC
CONVERTER
CAP VS
CAP VM
DRUM VS
DRUM VM
DMC III
LOAD ON/
UNLOAD FR
DERR
VIC3
CERR
LOAD+/LOADIC1301
MO DRIVE
U/V/W
Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil
LOADING MOTOR
DRUM MOTOR
CAPSTAN MOTOR
CFG2
DA CFG
DA S REEL
S REEL Hall SENSOR
DA T REEL
T REEL Hall SENSOR
Fig. 2-13
2-17
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)
IC1101
SDRAM
IC1102
MACS
IC1001
CCD
IC1002
TG/CDS
AGC/AD
Card camera mode of
signal flow
Still Picture
Signal
Processing
FR
MI-COM
Personal computer
connection mode
of signal flow
MEMORY
CARD
USB
CONTROLER
USB
TERMINAL
IC2301
VIC3
Fig. 2-14
In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the MACS. In the personal
computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller.
The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode.
2-18
5-5 Error Detection
If an abnormality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD
indicates “PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions
The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind
Drum error
Condition
Detection
Error detecting mode
Starting / steady
D-FG
FG frequency when steady
900Hz
Error detecting level
Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time
Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Capstan error
Starting / steady
FG frequency when steady
1347Hz
Error detecting level
Starting : 80% max.
C-FG
Steady : 60Hz max.
Error detecting time
Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 2sec.
Reel error
Error detection
Starting / Normal / UNLOAD
T, S-REEL FG
Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is
C-FG
Starting : M ore than 3294
Steady : M ore than 2256
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error
M ode transfer
Error detection
M ode transfer time
M ode SW
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection
The following table gives processing after error detection.
• Pop up
: Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear
• Error stop
: Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
Cassette in
Loading
During
loading
Loading
completed
During tape
running
During mode
Drum error
Pop up
Pop up
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Capstan error
Pop up
-------
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Reel error
-------
-------
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Error stop
Loading error
Pop up
Pop up
Error stop
Error stop
-------
Error stop
2-19
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-2 List of Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-1
2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
2-1 Setting A -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
2-2 Setting B -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3
3. Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3-1 Outline ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
3-4 Indication in Service Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-6
4. Description of Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-7
4-1 Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-7
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-8
4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-8
4-2-2 Mechanical Error Analysis Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
4-3 Cleaning Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-12
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-12
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-12
5. Service Hints ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-13
5-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-13
5-2 Location of Main Elements --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
5-3 Current Consumption Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-16
6. Trouble Shooting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-17
6-1 Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-17
6-2 Camera Picture Faulty --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-18
6-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-19
6-4 Startup Window Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-20
7. Mechanical Error Applicability Table ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-21
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name
Item Number
Purpose
Remarks
Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/NT SC)
DY9-1380-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment T ape (tracking)
DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment
DMC III
Cassette T orque Gauge for DV
DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment
DMC III
DV Cleaning T ape (hard)
DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning
DMC III
Driver bit for tape path adjustment
DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment
DMC III
Color bar chart
DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600° K for 100V
DY9-2039-100 Camera electrical adjustment (JPN)
Color Viewer 5600° K for 115V
DY9-2039-115 Camera electrical adjustment (USA)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K
DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø46mm
DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
CASSET T E, SERVICE MODE
DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment
NEW
EXT ENSION CONNECT OR (20pin)
DY9-1387-000 T est pin extended
NEW
1-2 List of Supplies
Item Name
Grease FLOIL C-1Z
Item Number
Purpose
DY9-3039-000 Lubrication
Remarks
DMC III
Logenest Lambda A-74
CY9-8102-000 Lubrication
Lens
Grease GE-C9
CY9-8043-000 Lubrication
Lens
Grease FLOIL 948P
DMC III
Hanal FL-778
Cover
Hanal KS-39M
Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663G
CY9-8129-000 Adhesive
LCD
Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm)
DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive T ape, No.354E
DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W × L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive T ape, No. 501F
DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type)
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm)
double-side-coated adhesive tape
DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
3-1
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state.
(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-III) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A.
(3) Adjustments related to DMC-III other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform
them with the Setting B.
2-1 Setting A
Envelope Check)
(1) Detach the Lithium Battery Cover.
(2) Connect the extension connector (DY9-1387-000) to
CN2900.
(3) Observe the PB-RF waveform output from the extension connector
Extension connector (DY9-1387-000)
Pin No.
Signal Designation
7
GND
19
SWP
21
GND
23
PBRF
DY9-1387-000
Fig. 3-1
Tracking Adjustment)
(1) Remove the CASSETTE COVER referring to Fig. 3-2 (a).
(2) When the posts are going to be adjusted, eject and remove the cassette once and perform the prospective adjustment as shown in
Fig. 3-2 (b).
(3) Repeat the observation of the PB-RF waveform and the prospective adjustment until fluctuation of envelope is re-moved.
Note : When the tracking adjustment is going to be performed, refer to Chapter 2-8 on page 4-48 : Tape Path Adjustment.
(a)
(b)
CASSETTE COVER
×2
ADJUSTMENT DRIVER
×2
Fig. 3-2
3-2
2-2 Setting B
(1) Remove the FRONT COVER, REAR COVER, LEFT COVER UNIT, RIGHT COVER UNIT and JACK P.C.B. referring to
“Chapter 4-1: Disassembling and Reassembling”.
Note 1 : Referring to Fig.3-3, connect the required cables.
Note 2 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A.
Note 3 : For EJECT, select the service mode and use the wireless remote controller.
(Note : Same manner for recorder keys)
WIRELESS CONTROLLER
LEFT COVER UNIT
REAR COVER UNIT
CN101
MONITOR TV
CN3201
CA-570
CN2101
JACK P.C.B.
Fig. 3-3
3-3
3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2)
(2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000) is required in addition to
the wireless remote controller.
(3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the “Audio dubbing” and “SLOW” keys of the
wireless remote controller.
As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the “CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE” is removed.
(4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handled using the keys on the main unit and the remote control
mode 1.
(5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled.
(6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode
(1) Cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386-000)
Set the ((CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE)) in the equipment
and load the data.
(2) Press the “Dubbing” key on the wireless remote controller
that is set at Remote controller code 2.
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press
“Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys simultaneously for 2 sec.
* The remote controller code setting on the DVC main
unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1
and 2.
DY9-1386-000
(3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed
and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen.
Fig. 3-4
* Pressing the “SLOW” key performs the changeover
to the normal mode from the service mode.
As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode
is available by setting the “Audio dubbing” key even
if the cassette for transfer to service mode is removed.
Fig. 3-5
3-4
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode
(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2.
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the “Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys simultaneously for 2 sec.
4. SERCH +
3. START/STOP
11. PLAY
5. SEARCH -
8. FF
10. SERCH SELECT
6. FRAME +
9. REW
Remote Controller
Code 2 setting
12. STOP
7. FRAME -
14. × 2
1. DUBBING
2. SLOW
13. PAUSE
Fig. 3-6
No.
Key Designation (in Normal Mode)
Key Designation (in Service Mode)
Function
1
DUBBING
SERVICE MODE
Change over to service mode
2
SLOW
NORMAL MODE
Change over to normal mode
3
START/STOP
CS+
Increases CS by 1.
4
SEARCH +
FUNCTION +
Increases FUNCTION by 1.
5
SEARCH -
FUNCTION -
Decreases FUNCTION by 1.
6
FRAME +
HIGH ADDRESS +
Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
7
FRAME -
HIGH ADDRESS -
Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
8
FF
ADDRESS +
Increases ADDRESS by 1.
9
REW
ADDRESS -
Decreases ADDRESS by 1.
10
SEARCH SELECT
MODE SELECT
Change over to RD/WR mode
11
PLAY
DATA +
Increases DATA by 1.
12
STOP
DATA -
Decreases DATA by 1.
13
PAUSE
STORE
Defines/w rites DATA.
14
×2
EJECT
Performs EJECT.
3-5
3-4 Indication in Service Mode
Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
4
5
18
6
8
9
1
2
3
10
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 3-7
1.
2.
Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (“SERV”)
MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)
3.
4.
Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.)
CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)
5.
6.
Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)
ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)
7.
8.
DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)
9. Indicates the absolute track No.
10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup)
11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup)
12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM.
13. Indicates the version of the MODE MI-COM.
14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the FR MI-COM.
15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the FR MI-COM.
16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head.
17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head.
18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution)
3-6
4. Description of Service Modes
4-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>
An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indicated in exponential representation.
Low ch.
High ch.
EO 2 5 E1
Example) ‘25’ is indicated:
Error rate = 2×10 -5
2 × 10
-5
Fig. 3-8
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>
To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the
table below.
Low ch.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
High ch.
AO 2 3 A1
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
2 3
Example) ‘23’is indicated:
Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
(hexadecimal)
(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35 (decimal)
In the product specifications, the error rate on both channels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
Error rate =28H or less
Fig. 3-9
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
<Change to an AUDIO error rate>
ST EP
1
MONIT OR
PROCEDURE
1) Make setting shown at right.
CS
Function
0
10
Microcomputer operation
ADDR MODE
001D
ST
DT
00 →03 Product setting
03
↑
↑
↑
Remarks) Selecting DT back to "0"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.)
RD
3-7
Audio error rate indication
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication
<Outline>
(1) On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode. (Normal indication mode and
analysis mode available)
(2) In the normal indication mode of the mechanical error, two types of indications appear on the service mode initial screen: the data
indication retained only by the main battery and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V.
(3) The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.
(4) For changeover to the mechanical error analysis mode, perform the STEP-2 operation shown below.
ST EP
1
2
MONIT OR
PROCEDURE
CS
Function
0
ADDR MODE
DT
08
0008
ST
00
Error data held only in the POWER-ON
↑
0
↑
10
↑
0079
RD
ST
↑
01
state is indicated.
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
Service screen change.
4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode
Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.
E : TAPE END
B : TAPE TOP
D : DRUM ERROR
C : CAPSTAN ERROR
S : S-REEL ERROR
T : T- REEL ERROR
L : LOADING MTR ERROR
D : DEW ERROR
Fig. 3-10
3-8
4-2-2 Mechanical Error Analysis Mode
1. Address of the sequence that was under execution
in the event of an error.
(information of the control status.)
2. S reel error detection data in the event of an error.
3. T reel error detection data in the event of an error.
1
2
3
Fig. 3-11
<How to Check>
By following the steps (1) through (4) shown below, the “Sequence” in which the error has occurred can be checked in addition to the
type of the mechanical error.
(1) First of all, check the “Sequence” that matches the data (1), referring to “Address” in the mechanical error applicability table.
(2) For the applicable “Sequence” in 1 above, if S reel error detection sensitivity level (CEh or 8Dh) is listed in the “Sreel” subfield of
the “Mecha Error” field, compare it with the data (2). If the data (2) is above the S reel error detection sensitivity level listed, the
error history indication should be “S reel error”.
(3) For the applicable “Sequence” in 1 above, if T reel error detection sensitivity level (CEh or 8Dh) is listed in the “Treel” subfield of
the “Mecha Error” field, compare it with the data (3). If the data (3) is above the T reel error detection sensitivity level listed, the
error history should be “T reel error”.
(4) Unless S or T reel error is determined in step 2 or 3 above, the error history should be the error condition specified in the “Mechanical Error Applicablity Table” field marked with
Note :
.
If a multiple number of items are specified, any of the applicable items should have occurred.
The DEW errors can be identified according to whether or not there is dew indication at an occurrence of an
error.
* The reference table of actual mechanical errors is given at the end of Chapter 3. (See “7: Mechanical Error
Table” on p. 3-21.)
3-9
4-3 Cleaning Mode
When cleaning the head with hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000), set up the cleaning mode according to the procedure given
below.
Note :
ST EP
1
After head cleaning, be sure to restore the settings to normal.
PROCEDURE
MONIT OR
CS
Function
ADDR MODE
DT
0
10
0111
ST
--
2) Increases DT by 2.
↑
↑
↑
↑
--
(Example: 80 → 82)
3) Perform ST ORE. (Press PAUSE key. ↑
RD
↑
↑
1) Change over to the normal mode and turn OFF the power supply.
--
(Change bit-02 to 1 from 0.)
2
Completion of cleaning mode setup
Resetting of cleaning mode
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera
<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation.
(2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera.
(3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the “ST” mode.
Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
ST EP
WB SET
MONIT OR
PROCEDURE
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND
CS
Function
2
08
3300
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3301
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3302
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3303
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3304
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3305
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3306
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3307
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3308
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
3309
RD
--
ST
--
↑
2
↑
08
↑
330A
RD
--
ST
--
WB
LOCK
WB
T URBO
WB
OUT DOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.)
WB
INDOOR
IRIS
OPEN
IRIS
CLOSE
AGC
MAX
AGC
MIN
COLOR
BAR
White
ADDR MODE
DT
100%
↑
08
↑
330B
--
↑
2
RD
White
ST
--
50%
↑
↑
↑
RD
--
3-10
WB is set.
WB is locked.
WB high-speed setting mode
WB outdoor mode
WB indoor mode
T he iris is opened forcibly.
T he iris is closed forcibly.
A value of AGC gain is maximized.
A value of AGC gain is minimized.
Outputs color bar from MACS.
Outputs white 100% from MACS.
Outputs white 50% from MACS.
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting
<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) If the DATA (in hexadecimal representation) is D0 or D4, the lens has been reset.
* In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset.
* In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.
MONIT OR
ST EP
PROCEDURE
1
CS
Function
2
00
ADDR MODE
4663
RD
DT
--
RAM data indication
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches
<Generals>
(1) The MODE and FR MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the
connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state.
(2) Perform the check in the RD mode.
4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port
ST EP
NAME
1
V3T oM PC
25
Li3V Detect
DESCRIPT ION
CS
Function
ADDR DAT A BIT
PC mode communication:PC mode start
1
01
000A
4
Detection of decrease in lithium
1
01
0007
3
battery voltage
64
PANEL Open SW
LCD open detection
1
01
0002
6
65
PANEL B/T SW
LCD reverse detection
1
01
0002
5
66
EJECT SW
EJECT detection
1
01
0002
4
67
Cassette IN SW
Cassette IN detection
1
01
0002
3
68
Photo SW
Full pressing of Photo SW
1
01
0002
2
69
Half Photo SW
Halfway pressing of Photo SW
1
01
0002
1
70
ST ART /ST OP
T rigger SW
1
01
0002
0
71
DC J DET
DC JACK detection
1
01
0002
7
75
PAE/GREEN SW
PAE mode select SW
1
01
0001
3
76
VT R POWER SW
VCR mode SW
1
01
0001
2
77
CAM POWER SW
Camera mode SW
1
01
0001
1
78
T /C PW SW
T ape/Card SW
1
01
0001
0
79
SDET
S terminal detection
1
01
0000
7
3-11
REMARK
4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port
ST EP
87
NAME
Batt A/D
DESCRIPT ION
CS Function
ADDR
AD DAT A（00 ∼FF）
1
0007
Battery voltage value
Battery voltage
02
Battery type
88
Batt Info A/D
1
02
0006
REMARK
00 ∼33
34 ∼65
66 ∼99
9A ∼CD CE ∼FF
Batt
BP -535
BP -522
BP -511
Not
BP -508
/512
89
A/D V
Charge voltage
1
02
0005
Not observable
90
A/D I
Charge current
1
02
0004
Not observable
91
KEY AD0
KEY A/D0
1
02
0003
00 ∼2B：CARDMIX，2C∼66 ：SELF
92
KEY AD1
KEY A/D1
1
02
0002
00 ∼2B：DE ON/OFF，2C∼66 ：DE SEL
93
KEY AD2
KEY A/D2
1
02
0001
00 ∼2B：ST OP ，2C∼66 ：FF
67 ∼A6 ：PLAY/PAUSE
95
KEY AD3
KEY A/D3
1
02
0000
00 ∼2B：REW ，2C∼66 ：MENU
67 ∼A6 ：MENU execution
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port
ST EP
9
NAME
EXT DET
DESCRIPT ION
CS
Function
ADDR
DAT A BIT
0
01
0000
7
External microphone detection
REMARK
(Audio. C)
107
AV DET
AV jack detect
0
01
0004
3
338
USB DET
USB Detect
0
01
0009
5
268
REC PROOF
T ape recording inhibited
0
01
000A
4
214
CARD PRO
Card recording inhibited
0
01
000A
2
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port
ST EP
NAME
DESCRIPT ION
CS Function
ADDR
AD DAT A（ 00 ～FF）
339
SHOE ID1
AA SHOE ID1
0
02
000E
48
CASE IN
Cassette detection
0
02
000C Cassette
inserted
Cassette
not inserted
216
CARD DET
CARD detection
0
02
000A Card
inserted
Card
not inserted
137
T EMD
Lens thermometer output
0
02
0008
285
ZOOMKEY
Zoom key output
0
02
0007
217
I ENC
IRIS ENC output
0
02
340
Y GYRO
YAW side GYRO output
0
02
0005
50
P GYRO
PIT H side GYRO output
0
02
0004
138
DEW AD
DEW detection
0
02
0003
218
MSW AD
Mechanical position
0
02
0002
286
T APE END
Ending detection
0
02
0001
341
T APE T OP
Beginning detection
0
02
0000
3-12
0006
T ELE
side
Intermediate
Small diaphragm
WIDE
side
Open
REMARK
5. Service Hints
5-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
OPERATION KEY
EJECT P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
CVF P.C.B.
DC P.C.B.
JACK P.C.B.
R-KEY P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
CAC P.C.B.
CARD P.C.B.
D SW2 P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
Fig.3-12
3-13
5-2 Location of Main Elements
MAIN P.C.B.
IC103
RESET
IC100
MODE MI-COM
IC301
MOTOR DRIVE
IC300
OPE AMP
FU1801
FU3205
IC102
BACKUP
FU3201
FU3202
FU3204
FU3203
IC2100
VIF2
IC2301
VIC3
IC3204
2.5V REGULATOR
IC2000
VRP2
IC2300
FLASH
IC1802
OPE/AMP
IC1102
MACS
IC1101
SDRAM
IC803
4V REGULATOR
IC2302
SDRAM
IC801
AUDIO INTERFACE
IC3201
DC/DC CONVERTER
CONTROL
IC3203
4.7V REGULATOR
IC3202
2.7V REGULATOR
IC802
SP DRIVER
Fig. 3-13
3-14
CAC P.C.B.
IC1701
MOTOR DRIVE
IC1002
TG/CDS/AGC/AD
IC1001
V-DRIVER
IC1502
EEPROM
JACK P.C.B.
IC1202
IRIS DRIVE
IC1501
EVF DRIVER
LCD P.C.B.
IC1601
P SENSOR GYRO
IC4201
DC/DC CONVERTER
CONTROL
IC1602
Y SENSOR GYRO
IC903
LCD DRIVE
Fig. 3-14
3-15
IC902
SERI/PARA CONVERTER
IC901
EEPROM
5-3 Current Consumption Check
The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition
Preset voltage
: Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
: 7.4V
POWER SW
CAMERA
VCR
MODE
Current consumption (A)
REC PAUSE
0.46
REC
0.51
STOP
0.45
PLAY
0.54
POWER OFF
0.3 (mA)
3-16
6. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
6-1 Power Supply
<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. → MODE microcomputer starts up. → MODE microcomputer
outputs VCR ON “H” signal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Establishes communication with the FR
microcomputer. → FR microcomputer initializes recorder mechanical chassis. → After initialized, the MODE MI-COM is brought into
the standby status with the VCR ON changed to VCR Low.
After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures.
Power supply mode switch operation → After MODE MI-COM is accepted, VCR ON “H” is output. → The PWM driver is started to
turn on various power supplies. → The FR MI-COM is started to control the system.
<Check Points>
1)
Key Inputs
2)
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indicated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3)
Error in Mechanism (P. 3-8)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4)
VCR ON “H”, CAM ON “H” (control signal from MODE microcomputer) Outputs
Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller.
5)
Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuity of the fuses FU3201, 3202, 3203, 3204, 3205 and 1801 on the MAIN P.C.B. In case of NG, replace the fuse
6)
and check the power consumption.
Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
3-17
6-2 Camera Picture Faulty
<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → CAC P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (MACS → VIC3→VIF2) → JACK P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1)
Check of lens reset (p.3-11)
If no camera picture appears, check if the lens has been reset by means of the service mode. In case of NG, check the lens.
2)
Check of blue back output
If the blue back is confirmed, the signal line subsequent to VIC3 is considered to be OK.
3)
Check of MACS generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (P.3-10)
The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the MACS on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, if the output of the white
4)
100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal line subsequent to MACS is considered to be OK.
Check of CCD output
5)
The CCD output is sampled by IC1002 (TG/CDS/AGC/AD). Check the signal.
Check by command particular to camera (p.3-10)
Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the service mode.
3-18
6-3 Faulty of Playback Picture
<Hints>
In the DV, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the
ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by
the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded
due to the degraded tape or the lowered head output, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.
<Check Points>
1)
Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2)
Error Rate (P. 3-7)
In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10-5.
In case of NG, take the following procedure.
(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.
(2) Run a cleaning tape.
Use the cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).
[Playback time]
Hard cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000)
: After replacement of the drum unit → 25 seconds
For cleaning
→ 25 seconds per time, Up to three times
* When using hard-type cleaning tape, select the cleaning mode on the product main unit.
(Refer to 4-3 - Cleaning Mode, p. 3-10.)
(3) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with
alcohol.
* Take care not to damage the head.
* Do not touch the head with bare hand.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a
tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to
inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.
3-19
6-4 Startup Window Setting
The startup window (user setting) contains a default image* at shipment from the factory. If any other image is written over the default
image, it is deleted completely. So, be cautious in such cases as MAIN P.C.B. replacement.
* Default image (Image file : Contained in “7. Appendix”.)
User Setting
3-20
7. Mechanical Error Applicability Table
The address data in the mechanical error applicability table varies depending on the version of the FR MI-COM. Check the MI-COM
version, and refer to the mechanical error applicability table relevant to the MI-COM version.
Mechanical Error Applicability Table (for MAIN program version “C204” in FR MI-COM)
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
Drum Caps SReel TReel Loading DEW
Loading error being stopped
-
-
-
-
●
-
ResetMechaGAP
At P. ON, mechanical reset
-
-
-
-
●
-
ResetMechaSTOP
-
-
-
-
-
-
0A90E4
MechaLMOEmerg
0A9268
0A9398
0A9476
ResetMechaPLAY
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A95AA
ResetMechaPOPUP
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A9662
ResetMechaLD1
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A97EE
ResetMechaLD2
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A9990
ResetMecha0020
At P. ON, changeover to mechanical reset end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0A9E70
MechaDoneToEjectEmerg
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A9F5E
MechaStopEmergToEjectEmerg0010
Error EJECT
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AA07A
Error EJECT
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AA146
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AA1C0
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AA26A
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AA500
MechaDoneToEject
Error EJECT
●
●
-
-
-
-
0AA94A
MechaStopToEject0020
EJECT (Tape inserted)
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AAAC6
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AACD6
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AAE32
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AAF06
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AAF98
MechaStopToEjectNoCas0010
EJECT (Tape not inserted)
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AB05A
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB11C
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB1D4
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB29C
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB71A
MechaStopLoop
Stop
-
-
-
-
-
●
0AB7EA
MechaEjectToStop
Tape loading start
●
●
-
-
-
●
0ABD36
MechaEjectToStop0020
Tape being loaded (Tape inserted)
-
●
-
-
●
●
0ABF0A
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AC0B6
Tape being loaded (Tape not inserted)
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AC17E
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AC3E4
●
-
-
-
-
-
0AC472
Blank search start
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AC4CE
Tape loading end (Tape inserted)
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AC516
Blank search start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AC658
Blank search start
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AC6E0
Blank search start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AC83A
Blank being searched
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AC9AC
Changeover to blank search end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0ACA16
-
●
8Dh
8Dh
-
●
0ACE8A
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AD05E
-
●
-
8Dh
-
●
0AD102
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
3-21
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0AD172
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AD218
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AD3C4
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AD4C2
MechaFFToStop
Changeover : FF → STOP
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AD6EE
MechaRewToStop
Changeover : REW → STOP
-
●
8Dh
-
●
●
0ADA2E
MechaRecPauseToStop
Changeover : Rec Pause → STOP
-
●
CEh
-
●
●
0ADD9C
MechaPlayToStop
Changeover : PLAY → STOP
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0ADEB0
MechaStillToStop
Changeover : Still → STOP
-
●
CEh
-
●
●
0AE274
MechaXToEnd
Start of processing at end of tape
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AE5C6
MechaXToEnd0010
Processing at end of tape
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AE64A
MechaXToEnd0020
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0AEB0C
MechaXToEnd0030
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AEC04
MechaTopLoop
Processing at beginning of tape
-
-
-
-
-
●
0AEC6C
MechaXToTop
Start of processing at beginning of tape
-
●
-
-
-
-
0AEEA0
MechaXToTop0020
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AF146
MechaFFLoop
FF
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF1F4
MechaFFSlowToFF
Changeover : FF × 9.5 → × 30
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF2C6
MechaFFToFFSlow
Changeover : FF × 30 → × 9.5
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF372
MechaHSCueToFFSlow
Changeover : CUE → FF
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF3FE
MechaStopToFFSlow
Changeover : STOP → FF
●
●
-
-
●
●
0AF62A
MechaRewLoop
REW
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF6D8
MechaRewSlowToRew
Changeover : REW × 9.5 → × 30
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF7AA
MechaRewToRewSlow
Changeover : REW × 30 → × 9.5
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF856
MechaHSRevToRewSlow
Changeover : REV → REW × 9.5
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF902
MechaStopToRewSlow
Changeover : STOP → REW
●
●
●
-
●
●
0AFC12
MechaRecLoop
Rec
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AFC8E
MechaRecPauseToRec
Rec start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B000A
MechaRecPauseToRec0010
Changeover to Rec start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0090
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B01B2
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B0338
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B052C
MechaRecPauseLoop
Rec PAUSE
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B058A
MechaStopToRecPause
Changeover : STOP → REC
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B0702
MechaStopToRecPause0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0860
MechaESFStillToRecPause
Changeover to Rec search FWD end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B08D2
MechaESRStillToRecPause
Changeover to Rec search RVS end
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0B0B2A
RecEndingSequence
Changeover to Rec end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0D08
RecEndingSequence0010
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B0FFE
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B115E
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B141E
MechaPlayLoop
PLAY
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B14B0
MechaStopToPlay
Changeover : STOP → PLAY
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B15DC
MechaStopTopToPlay
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B1716
MechaStopTopToPlay0010
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B17F0
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B1880
MechaStillFwdToPlay
Changeover : Still → PLAY
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B1B40
MechaFwd1xToPlay
Capstan × 1 being rotated
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B1D20
MechaFwd1xLoop
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
3-22
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
-
-
8Dh
-
●
-
-
8Dh
-
●
●
-
-
-
●
-
-
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B1DBC
MechaPlayToFwd1x
PLAY
-
0B1E1E
MechaFwd2xToFwd1x
Changeover : capstan × 2 → × 1
-
0B2022
MechaStillFwdToFwd1x
Changeover : Still → capstan × 1
-
0B22A8
MechaStillRvsToFwd1x
-
●
0B24F0
MechaStillRvsToFwd1x0010
-
-
0B25B0
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B294E
MechaRvs1xLoop
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B29B4
MechaRvs2xToRvs1x
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B2A18
MechaStillRvsToRvs1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B2BDE
MechaStillFwdToRvs1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B2E06
MechaStillFwdToRvs1x0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B2EC6
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B30E4
MechaFwd2xLoop
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B314A
MechaFwd1xToFwd2x
Changeover : capstan × 1 → × 2 rotation
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B31DA
MechaCueToFwd2x
CUE end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B32FA
MechaRvs2xLoop
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3360
MechaRvs1xToRvs2x
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B33C4
MechaRevToRvs2x
Changeover to REV end
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B34CE
MechaCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3534
MechaFwd2xToCue
Changeover to CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B35FE
MechaHSCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3664
MechaFFToHSCue
Changeover : FF → CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B38D0
MechaLCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3936
MechaFFToLCue
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3B5C
MechaReviewLoop
REV
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3BC2
MechaRvs2xToRev
Changeover to REV start
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3C8E
MechaHSReviewLoop
REV
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3CF4
MechaRewToHSReview
Changeover : REW → REV
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3F68
MechaLReviewLoop
REV
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3FCE
MechaRewToLReview
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B42DA
MechaStillFwdLoop
Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B431A
MechaPlayToStillFwd
Changeover : PLAY → Still
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B448A
MechaPlayToStillFwd0025
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B44EC
MechaStillRvsToStillFwd
Changeover : Still RVS → Still FWD
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B45C8
MechaStillRvsToStillFwd0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4640
MechaFrameFwdToStillFwd
Changeover : Forward fame feed → Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B476C
MechaStillRvsLoop
Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B47AC
MechaStillFwdToStillRvs
Changeover : Still FWD → Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4888
MechaStillFwdToStillRvs0010
Changeover : Still FWD → Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B48F4
MechaFrameRvsToStillRvs
Changeover : Reverse frame feed → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4954
MechaSlowRvsToStillRvs
Changeover : 1/10 slow RVS → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4A0E
MechaStillFwdToFrameFwd
Changeover to forward frame feed start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4A94
MechaFrameFwd0000
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4BA6
MechaStillRvsToFrameRvs
Changeover to reverse frame feed start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4C2C
MechaFrameRvs0000
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4E1E
MechaSlow10Fwd0000
1/10 slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B51F4
MechaStillFwdToSlow10Fwd
Changeover : Still → 1/10 slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B5634
MechaSlow10Rvs0000
1/10 slow RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
3-23
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
Changeover : Still → 1/10 slow RVS
0B5A0A
MechaStillRvsToSlow10Rvs
-
0B5E48
MechaShuttleFwdLoop
Edit search FWD
-
0B5EAE
MechaStillFwdToShuttleFwd
Changeover : Still → Edit search FWD
-
●
-
●
8Dh
-
●
-
-
●
-
-
-
-
●
-
0B6110
MechaShuttleRvsLoop
Edit search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B6176
MechaStillRvsToShuttleRvs
Changeover : Still → Edit search RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B6398
MechaSEFStillLoop
Edit search FWD still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B63D0
MechaShuttleFwdToSEFStill
Edit search FWD → Edit search FWD still
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B651C
MechaShuttleFwdToSEFStill0025
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B65E0
MechaSERStillLoop
Edit search RVS still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6618
MechaShuttleRvsToSERStill
Edit search RVS → Edit search RVS still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B674A
MechaShuttleRvsToSERStill0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B67FE
MechaEdPauseRvsLoop
Changeover to Rec REW (RVS → FWD)
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6836
MechaRecPauseToEdPauseRvs
Rec search RVS start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B6C7C
MechaRReviewRvsLoop
Changeover to Rec REW
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6CB4
MechaEdPauseRvsToRRRvs
Rec REW (RVS) start
-
●
-
-
-
-
0B6E2C
MechaEdPauseRvsToRRRvs0012
Rec search RVS (RVS)
-
-
CEh
-
-
●
0B6EF2
Changeover to Rec search RVS (RVS) end
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0B7128
MechaRReviewFwdLoop
Changeover to REC REW
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B7160
MechaRRRvsToRRFwd
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0B74C6
MechaRRRvsToRRFwd0031
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B762A
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B7AA2
MechaEdSearchFwdLoop
Rec search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B7B08
MechaRecPauseToEdSearchFwd
Rec search FWD start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B7C4E
MechaESFStillToEdSrchFwd
Changeover : Rec search FWD →
-
●
-
-
-
●
-
●
-
-
-
●
Rec search FWD
0B7D82
MechaESRStillToESF
Changeover : Rec search RVS →
Rec search FWD
0B82DA
MechaEdSearchRvsLoop
Rec search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B8340
MechaEPRToEdSearchRvs
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0B8436
MechaESFStillToESR
-
●
-
-
-
●
Rec search RVS
0B8792
MechaESFStillLoop
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B87CA
MechaEdSearchFwdToESFStill
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B897A
MechaESRStillLoop
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B89B2
MechaESRToESRStill
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B8DA6
MechaRStillToPhotoSearchFwd
Photo search FWD start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B8FBE
MechaPhotoSearchFwd0000
●
-
-
-
●
-
0B907E
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9156
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B91AA
Photo search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B925A
Changeover to photo search FWD end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B939A
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9560
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B95CC
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B9688
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B9746
Photo search FWD end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B98E0
MechaFStillToPhotoSearchRvs
Changeover: Still → photo search RVS start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9AF4
MechaPhotoSearchRvs0000
Photo search RVS start
●
-
-
-
●
-
3-24
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0B9BC0
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9C34
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B9CD0
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9D30
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9D92
Photo search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9E40
Changeover to photo search RVS end
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9FAA
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BA268
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA2D4
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA3B8
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA476
Photo search RVS end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA58C
MechaDsearchFwd1000
Date search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BA692
MechaDsearchFwd1010
Changeover to date search FWD end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BA9BE
MechaDsearchFwd1020
-
●
-
8Dh
-
●
0BAC4A
MechaDsearchFwd1030
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BAD0A
MechaDsearchFwd1040
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BAF18
MechaDsearchFwd1050
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0BB0EE
MechaDsearchFwd1065
Changeover to date search FWD/RVS end
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BB2A4
MechaDsearchFwd1080
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BB550
MechaDsearchFwd1090
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BB610
MechaDsearchFwd1100
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BB8B4
MechaDsearchFwd1200
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BB946
MechaDsearchFwd1210
Changeover to date search RVS end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BBB52
MechaDsearchRvs1000
Date search FWD
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BBD2C
MechaATNFwd0010
ATN search FWD start
●
●
-
CEh
●
●
0BBF80
MechaATNFwd0020
ATN search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC15C
MechaATNFwd0035
Changeover to ATN search FWD end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC1DA
MechaATNFwd0040
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC2EA
MechaATNFwd0050
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC3E8
MechaATNFwd0060
ATN search FWD end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BC488
MechaATNRvs0010
ATN search RVS start
●
●
CEh
-
●
●
0BC756
MechaATNRvs0020
ATN search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BC8FC
MechaATNRvs0035
Changeover to ATN search RVS end
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BC970
MechaATNRvs0040
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BCA84
MechaATNRvs0050
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BCB34
MechaATNRvs0055
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BCBEE
MechaATNRvs0060
ATN search RVS end
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BCCE4
MechaAIPauseLoop
Dubbing pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BCD1C
MechaStillToAIPause
Changeover: Still → Audio dubbing pause
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BD0A6
MechaStillToAIPause0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD0FE
MechaAInsertToAIPause
Changeover to audio dubbing end
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BD516
MechaAInsertToAIPause0010
Dubbing end
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BD602
MechaAInsertLoop
Dubbing
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BD676
MechaAIPauseToAInsert
Dubbing start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BD7C2
MechaAVINSLoop
AV insert
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BD7F0
MechaRecPauseToAVINS
AV insert start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD8A6
MechaAVINSPauseToAVINS0010
Changeover to AV insert start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD914
AV insert start
-
●
-
-
-
●
3-25
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0BDA60
MechaRecPauseToAVIPause
Changeover to AV insert pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BDAAE
0BDAE6
MechaAVIPauseLoop
AV insert pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
MechaAVInsertToAVIPause
AV insert end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BDF48
ABSFwdSlw
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BDFE8
ABSRvsSlw
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE088
TurnRvsToFwd
Changeover: Still RVS → Still FWS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE2F6
TurnRvsToFwd0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BE3B8
TurnRvsToFwd0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BE522
TurnRvsToFwd0030
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BE592
TurnRvsToFwd0040
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BE65E
TurnRvsToFwd0060
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE76A
TurnFwdToRvs
Changeover: Still FWS → Still RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE9D2
TurnFwdToRvs0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BEA94
TurnFwdToRvs0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BEBFE
TurnFwdToRvs0030
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BEC6E
TurnFwdToRvs0040
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BED3A
TurnFwdToRvs0060
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BEE46
RepeatFrameFwd
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BEF28
RepeatFrameRvs
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BF73A
MechaErrorStop
Mechanical error recovery (error stop)
-
-
-
-
●
-
0C1646
MechaStillFwdToNewFSlow5
Changeover: Still → Slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0C16C0
MechaNewFSlow5Loop
Slow FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0C170E
MechaNewFSlow5ToFStill
Changeover: Slow FWD → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0C1758
MechaStillRvsToNewRSlow5
Changeover: Still → Slow RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0C17D4
MechaNewRSlow5Loop
Slow RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0C1822
MechaNewRSlow5ToRStill
Changeover: Slow RVS → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0C24E4
MechaRecReady
Changeover to Rec pause
-
-
-
-
-
●
0C25B0
MechaRecReady0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
3-26
Mechanical Error Applicability Table (for MAIN program version “1224” in FR MI-COM)
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0A9130
MechaLMOEmerg
Loading error being stopped
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A92B4
ResetMechaGAP
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A93E4
ResetMechaSTOP
-
-
-
-
-
-
0A94C2
ResetMechaPLAY
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A95F6
ResetMechaPOPUP
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A96AE
ResetMechaLD1
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A983A
ResetMechaLD2
●
-
-
-
●
-
0A99DC
ResetMecha0020
At P. ON, changeover to mechanical reset end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0A9EBC
MechaDoneToEjectEmerg
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
●
-
0A9FAA
Error EJECT
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AA0C6
Error EJECT
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AA192
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AA20C
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AA2B6
Error EJECT
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AA54C
MechaDoneToEject
Error EJECT
●
●
-
-
-
-
0AA996
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AAB12
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AAD22
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AAE7E
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AAF52
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AAFE4
-
●
-
-
●
-
0AB0A6
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB168
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB220
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB2E8
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AB766
MechaStopLoop
Stop
-
-
-
-
-
●
0AB836
MechaEjectToStop
Tape loading start
●
●
-
-
-
●
0ABD82
-
●
-
-
●
●
0ABF56
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AC102
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AC1CA
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AC430
●
-
-
-
-
-
0AC4BE
Blank search start
-
-
-
-
●
●
0AC51A
Tape loading end (Tape inserted)
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AC562
Blank search start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AC6A4
Blank search start
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AC72C
Blank search start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AC886
Blank being searched
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AC9F8
-
-
-
-
-
-
0ACA62
-
●
8Dh
8Dh
-
●
0ACED6
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AD0AA
-
●
-
8Dh
-
●
0AD14E
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AD1BE
-
-
-
-
-
-
0AD264
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AD410
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AD50E
MechaFFToStop
Changeover : FF → STOP
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
3-27
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0AD73A
MechaRewToStop
Changeover : REW → STOP
-
●
8Dh
-
●
●
0ADA7A
MechaRecPauseToStop
Changeover : Rec Pause → STOP
-
●
CEh
-
●
●
0ADDE8
MechaPlayToStop
Changeover : PLAY → STOP
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0ADEFC
MechaStillToStop
Changeover : Still → STOP
-
●
CEh
-
●
●
0AE2C0
MechaXToEnd
Start of processing at end of tape
-
●
-
-
-
●
0AE612
MechaXToEnd0010
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AE696
MechaXToEnd0020
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0AEB58
MechaXToEnd0030
-
-
-
-
●
-
0AEC50
MechaTopLoop
-
-
-
-
-
●
0AECB8
MechaXToTop
Start of processing at beginning of tape
-
●
-
-
-
-
0AEEEC
MechaXToTop0020
-
-
-
8Dh
●
●
0AF192
MechaFFLoop
FF
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF240
MechaFFSlowToFF
Changeover : FF × 9.5 → × 30
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF312
MechaFFToFFSlow
Changeover : FF × 30 → × 9.5
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF3BE
MechaHSCueToFFSlow
Changeover : CUE → FF
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AF44A
MechaStopToFFSlow
Changeover : STOP → FF
●
●
-
-
●
●
0AF676
MechaRewLoop
REW
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF724
MechaRewSlowToRew
Changeover : REW × 9.5 → × 30
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF7F6
MechaRewToRewSlow
Changeover : REW × 30 → × 9.5
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF8A2
MechaHSRevToRewSlow
Changeover : REV → REW × 9.5
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0AF94E
MechaStopToRewSlow
Changeover : STOP → REW
●
●
●
-
●
●
0AFC5E
MechaRecLoop
Rec
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0AFCDA
MechaRecPauseToRec
Rec start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0056
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B00DC
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B01FE
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B0384
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0578
MechaRecPauseLoop
Rec PAUSE
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B05D6
MechaStopToRecPause
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B074E
MechaStopToRecPause0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B08AC
MechaESFStillToRecPause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B091E
MechaESRStillToRecPause
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0B0B76
RecEndingSequence
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B0D54
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B104A
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B11AA
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B146A
MechaPlayLoop
PLAY
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B14FC
MechaStopToPlay
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B1628
MechaStopTopToPlay
●
●
-
-
●
●
0B1762
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B183C
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B18CC
MechaStillFwdToPlay
Changeover : Still → PLAY
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B1B8C
MechaFwd1xToPlay
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B1D6C
MechaFwd1xLoop
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B1E08
MechaPlayToFwd1x
PLAY
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B1E6A
MechaFwd2xToFwd1x
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B206E
MechaStillFwdToFwd1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B22F4
MechaStillRvsToFwd1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
3-28
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0B253C
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B25FC
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B299A
MechaRvs1xLoop
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B2A00
MechaRvs2xToRvs1x
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B2A64
MechaStillRvsToRvs1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B2C2A
MechaStillFwdToRvs1x
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B2E52
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B2F12
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B3130
MechaFwd2xLoop
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3196
MechaFwd1xToFwd2x
Changeover : capstan × 1 → × 2 rotation
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3226
MechaCueToFwd2x
CUE end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3346
MechaRvs2xLoop
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B33AC
MechaRvs1xToRvs2x
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3410
MechaRevToRvs2x
Changeover to REV end
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B351A
MechaCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3580
MechaFwd2xToCue
Changeover to CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B364A
MechaHSCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B36B0
MechaFFToHSCue
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B391C
MechaLCueLoop
CUE
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3982
MechaFFToLCue
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3BA8
MechaReviewLoop
REV
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3C0E
MechaRvs2xToRev
Changeover to REV start
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3CDA
MechaHSReviewLoop
REV
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B3D40
MechaRewToHSReview
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B3FB4
MechaLReviewLoop
REV
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B401A
MechaRewToLReview
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B4326
MechaStillFwdLoop
Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4366
MechaPlayToStillFwd
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B44D6
MechaPlayToStillFwd0025
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4538
MechaStillRvsToStillFwd
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4614
MechaStillRvsToStillFwd0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B468C
MechaFrameFwdToStillFwd
Changeover : Forward fame feed → Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B47B8
MechaStillRvsLoop
Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B47F8
MechaStillFwdToStillRvs
Changeover : Still FWD ® Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B48D4
MechaStillFwdToStillRvs0010
Changeover : Still FWD ® Still RVS
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4940
MechaFrameRvsToStillRvs
Changeover : Reverse frame feed ® Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B49A0
MechaSlowRvsToStillRvs
Changeover : 1/10 slow RVS ® Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B4A5A
MechaStillFwdToFrameFwd
Changeover to forward frame feed start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4AE0
MechaFrameFwd0000
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4BF2
MechaStillRvsToFrameRvs
Changeover to reverse frame feed start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4C78
MechaFrameRvs0000
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B4E6A
MechaSlow10Fwd0000
1/10 slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B5240
MechaStillFwdToSlow10Fwd
Changeover : Still → 1/10 slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B5680
MechaSlow10Rvs0000
1/10 slow RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B5A56
MechaStillRvsToSlow10Rvs
Changeover : Still → 1/10 slow RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B5E94
MechaShuttleFwdLoop
Edit search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B5EFA
MechaStillFwdToShuttleFwd
Changeover : Still → Edit search FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B615C
MechaShuttleRvsLoop
Edit search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
3-29
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0B61C2
MechaStillRvsToShuttleRvs
Changeover : Still → Edit search RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B63E4
MechaSEFStillLoop
Edit search FWD still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B641C
MechaShuttleFwdToSEFStill
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B6568
MechaShuttleFwdToSEFStill0025
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B662C
MechaSERStillLoop
Edit search RVS still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6664
MechaShuttleRvsToSERStill
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6796
MechaShuttleRvsToSERStill0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B684A
MechaEdPauseRvsLoop
Changeover to Rec REW (RVS → FWD)
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6882
MechaRecPauseToEdPauseRvs
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B6CC8
MechaRReviewRvsLoop
Changeover to Rec REW
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B6D00
MechaEdPauseRvsToRRRvs
Rec REW (RVS) start
-
●
-
-
-
-
0B6E78
Rec search RVS (RVS)
-
-
CEh
-
-
●
0B6F3E
Changeover to Rec search RVS (RVS) end
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0B7174
MechaRReviewFwdLoop
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B71AC
MechaRRRvsToRRFwd
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0B7512
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B7676
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B7AEE
MechaEdSearchFwdLoop
Rec search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B7B54
MechaRecPauseToEdSearchFwd
Rec search FWD start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B7C9A
MechaESFStillToEdSrchFwd
-
●
-
-
-
●
-
●
-
-
-
●
Rec search FWD
0B7DCE
MechaESRStillToESF
Changeover : Rec search RVS →
Rec search FWD
0B8326
MechaEdSearchRvsLoop
Rec search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B838C
MechaEPRToEdSearchRvs
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0B8482
MechaESFStillToESR
-
●
-
-
-
●
Rec search RVS
0B87DE
MechaESFStillLoop
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B8816
MechaEdSearchFwdToESFStill
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B89C6
MechaESRStillLoop
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B89FE
MechaESRToESRStill
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B8DF2
MechaRStillToPhotoSearchFwd
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B900A
●
-
-
-
●
-
0B90CA
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B91A2
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B91F6
Photo search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B92A6
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0B93E6
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B95AC
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B9618
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B96D4
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B9792
Photo search FWD end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0B992C
MechaFStillToPhotoSearchRvs
Changeover: Still → photo search RVS start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9B40
●
-
-
-
●
-
0B9C0C
-
●
-
-
-
●
0B9C80
-
-
-
-
-
●
0B9D1C
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9D7C
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
3-30
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0B9DDE
Photo search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9E8C
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0B9FF6
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BA2B4
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA320
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA404
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA4C2
Photo search RVS end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BA5D8
MechaDsearchFwd1000
Date search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BA6DE
MechaDsearchFwd1010
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BAA0A
MechaDsearchFwd1020
-
●
-
8Dh
-
●
0BAC96
MechaDsearchFwd1030
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BAD56
MechaDsearchFwd1040
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BAF64
MechaDsearchFwd1050
-
●
8Dh
-
-
●
0BB13A
MechaDsearchFwd1065
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BB2F0
MechaDsearchFwd1080
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BB59C
MechaDsearchFwd1090
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BB65C
MechaDsearchFwd1100
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BB900
MechaDsearchFwd1200
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BB992
MechaDsearchFwd1210
Changeover to date search RVS end
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BBB9E
MechaDsearchRvs1000
Date search FWD
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BBD78
MechaATNFwd0010
ATN search FWD start
●
●
-
CEh
●
●
0BBFCC
MechaATNFwd0020
ATN search FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC1A8
MechaATNFwd0035
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC226
MechaATNFwd0040
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC336
MechaATNFwd0050
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BC434
MechaATNFwd0060
ATN search FWD end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BC4D4
MechaATNRvs0010
ATN search RVS start
●
●
CEh
-
●
●
0BC7A2
MechaATNRvs0020
ATN search RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BC948
MechaATNRvs0035
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BC9BC
MechaATNRvs0040
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BCAD0
MechaATNRvs0050
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BCB80
MechaATNRvs0055
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BCC3A
MechaATNRvs0060
ATN search RVS end
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BCD30
MechaAIPauseLoop
Dubbing pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BCD68
MechaStillToAIPause
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BD0F2
MechaStillToAIPause0010
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD14A
MechaAInsertToAIPause
Changeover to audio dubbing end
-
●
CEh
-
-
●
0BD562
MechaAInsertToAIPause0010
Dubbing end
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BD64E
MechaAInsertLoop
Dubbing
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BD6C2
MechaAIPauseToAInsert
Dubbing start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BD80E
MechaAVINSLoop
AV insert
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BD83C
MechaRecPauseToAVINS
AV insert start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD8F2
Changeover to AV insert start
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BD960
AV insert start
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BDAAC
MechaRecPauseToAVIPause
Changeover to AV insert pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BDAFA
MechaAVIPauseLoop
AV insert pause
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BDB32
MechaAVInsertToAVIPause
AV insert end
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BDF94
ABSFwdSlw
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
3-31
Mecha Error
Address
Label
Sequence
0BE034
ABSRvsSlw
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE0D4
TurnRvsToFwd
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE342
TurnRvsToFwd0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BE404
TurnRvsToFwd0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BE56E
TurnRvsToFwd0030
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0BE5DE
TurnRvsToFwd0040
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BE6AA
TurnRvsToFwd0060
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BE7B6
TurnFwdToRvs
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BEA1E
TurnFwdToRvs0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
0BEAE0
TurnFwdToRvs0020
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BEC4A
TurnFwdToRvs0030
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0BECBA
TurnFwdToRvs0040
-
-
-
-
-
-
0BED86
TurnFwdToRvs0060
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BEE92
RepeatFrameFwd
Forward frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BEF74
RepeatFrameRvs
Reverse frame feed
-
●
-
-
-
●
0BF786
MechaErrorStop
Mechanical error recovery (error stop)
-
-
-
-
●
-
0C16D4
MechaStillFwdToNewFSlow5
Changeover: Still → Slow FWD
-
●
-
-
-
●
0C174E
MechaNewFSlow5Loop
Slow FWD
-
-
-
8Dh
-
●
0C179C
MechaNewFSlow5ToFStill
Changeover: Slow FWD → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0C17E6
MechaStillRvsToNewRSlow5
Changeover: Still → Slow RVS
-
●
-
-
-
●
0C1862
MechaNewRSlow5Loop
Slow RVS
-
-
8Dh
-
-
●
0C18B0
MechaNewRSlow5ToRStill
Changeover: Slow RVS → Still
-
-
-
-
-
-
0C2572
MechaRecReady
-
-
-
-
-
●
0C263E
MechaRecReady0010
-
-
-
-
-
●
3-32
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-2 Separation of Front Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
1-3 Separation of Accessory Shoe ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3
1-4 Separation of Right Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4
1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-5
1-6 Separation of Jack P.C.B ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7
1-8 Separation of Camera Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8
1-9 Separation of Main and CAC P.C.B.'s ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9
1-10 Separation of Recorder Holder --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-10
1-11 Separation of Front Cover Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11
1-12 Disassembling of Left Cover Unit - 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-12
1-15 Separation of LCD Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-15
1-16 Disassembling of Right Cover Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-16
1-20 Disassembling of LCD Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-20
1-21 Disassembling of LCD Unit - 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-21
1-22 Separation of CVF Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-22
1-23 Separation of Rear Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-23
1-24 Disassembling of CVF Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-24
1-27 Disassembling of Camera Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
1-28 Disassembling of Camera Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
1-29 Disassembling of Lens Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
1-30 List of Screws Used ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
1-31 List of Disassembly Photos -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-31
2. Adjustment Procedures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-33
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-33
2-2 AF Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
2-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35
2-3 IS Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-36
2-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-37
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-38
2-4-1 Iris Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-38
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-38
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-39
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-39
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-40
2-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-40
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-41
2-6 Color Balance Check ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-7 Recorder Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-7-1 Setting for Destination ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-7-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-44
2-7-3 C LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-45
2-7-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-45
2-7-5 SWP Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-7-6 C. FG Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-7-7 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-7-8 Flash Memory Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-7-9 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-47
2-8 Tape Path Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-48
1. Disassembling and Reassembling
Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
⋅ Lateral engaging connector
(The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)
∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.
⋅ Lengthwise engaging connector
(The instructions are given only in the boards interconnection diagram.)
Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8011-000)
(4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach UL tape at the same position in reassembling.
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart
(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
: MAIN FLOW
START
: SUB FLOW
1-2 Front Cover Unit
1-11 Mic Ass'y
: MAIN UNIT
1-3 Accessory Shoe
1-4 Right Cover Unit
1-15 LCD Unit
1-20 Hinge Ass'y
1-16 CARD P.C.B.
1-21 LCD P.C.B.
1-17 R-KEY Back Light Ass'y
1-18 R-KEY P.C.B.
1-18 DSW2 P.C.B.
1-5 Rear Cover Unit
1-22 CVF Unit
1-6 JACK P.C.B.
1-23 DC P.C.B.
1-7 Left Cover Unit
1-12 Operetion Key Ass'y
1-8 Recorder, Camera Unit
1-26 CVF P.C.B.
1-13 Speaker Ass'y
1-9 CAC P.C.B.
1-13 EJECT P.C.B.
1-9 MAIN P.C.B.
1-14 Cassette Arm Ass'y
1-10 Recorder Holder
1-8 Recorder Unit
1-10 DMC III
1-8 Camera Unit
1-28 CCD P.C.B.
1-29 Lens Unit
4-1
1-2 Separation of Front Unit
(1) Open the cassette cover, F Jack Cover and L Jack Cover and remove seven screws (b × 5, c × 1, d × 1).
(2) Disconnect CN701 and detach the Front Cover Unit.
(3) Remove the Cushion.
<Note on Reassembling>
(1) Attach the Cushion at the position shown in the figure. Run the MIC cable through the slit of the Cushion.
Cassette Cover
Front Cover Unit
(1) - b
Cushion
(1) - b
L Jack Cover
(1)
(1)
(3)
(1) - b
(2)
CN701
(2)
Note on Reassembling (1)
(1)
Hold the cushion by IR-LED holder.
(1) - d
Take care to
prevent the cushion
from being pushed
out of this line to
the right side.
(1) - b
(1) - c
F Jack Cover
Cushion
b
c
3mm
Metal
M1.7
d
4mm
Metal
M1.7
Run the MIC Cable
through the slit of the
Cushion.
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
CN701
Fig. 4-1
4-2
Take care to prevent
the cushion from
hanging over the boss.
1-3 Separation of Accessory Shoe
(1) Remove four screws (a × 4) and detach the Accessory Shoe.
(1) - a
Accessory Shoe
(1)
a
5mm
Metal
M1.7
Flat Head Screw
Fig. 4-2
4-3
1-4 Separation of Right Cover Unit
(1) Remove five screws (b × 3, c × 1, d × 1), disconnect CN990, CN1502 and CN4001 and detach the Right Cover Unit.
(2) Draw out the Shaft and detach the Card Cover. (Only for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
(1) Push the CN990 and CN1502 sufficiently so as to prevent them from being pinched in the part A.
(2) Since the Shaft may come out easily, take care not to lose the Shaft. (Only for ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A)
Before using the Card Cover and Shaft supplied for repair service, remove their protection sheet and shaft-dropping preventive
tape.
(1) - b
(1) - d
(1) - b
CN990
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
CN4001
CN1502
(2)
(1) - b
Right Cover Unit
(1) - c
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
only
Card Cover
Shaft
back of the Right Cover Unit
A
b
c
3mm
Metal
M1.7
d
4mm
Metal
M1.7
Shaft remove
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-3
4-4
1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit
(1) Remove three screws (d × 3), disconnect the CN1501, CN3201 and CN3202 and detach Rear Cover Unit.
CN1501
(1)
(1)
CN3202
(1)
(1)
CN3201
d
(1) - d
Rear Cover Unit
Fig. 4-4
4-5
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
1-6 Separation of Jack P.C.B
(1) Remove two screws (b × 2), disconnect the CN5, CN2101 and CN6 and detach the Jack P.C.B.
(2) Open the Cassette Cover and remove one screw (c × 1). Pull the part A to this side while lifting it, disengage the two claw parts B
and detach the C Lock Plate Unit.
(3) Remove two screws (b × 2) and detach the Tripod Base, C Lock Plate and Support Plate.
(1) When reassembling the C Lock Plate Unit, insert the part C into the hole and reverse the disassembling procedures (2). Make sure
that the two Dowels are connected.
(1) - b
Support Plate
(2)
CN5
(1)
(1)
CN2101
(1)
C Lock Plate
CN6
(2) - c
(1) - b
(3)
JACK P.C.B.
Tripod Base
(2)
(3) - b
Dowels B
Pull this part frontward.
Lift it.
b
Part A
Part C
c
3mm
Metal
M1.7
C Lock Plate Unit
Fig. 4-5
4-6
4mm
Metal
M1.7
1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit
(1) Remove three screws (b × 3), disconnect the CN101 and detach the Left Cover Unit.
Left Cover Unit
(1) - b
(1)
(1)
CN101
(1) - b
b
3mm
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 4-6
4-7
1-8 Separation of Camera Unit
(1) Remove two screws (b × 2), disconnect the CN891, CN1001 and CN1201 and detach the Camera Unit.
Note : The CN891 connector should be disconnected in the ZR70 MC A only. In the ZR65 MC A, ZR60 A, it is not
required to disconnect the CN891 connector since the shoe connector Ass’y and its relevant flexible cable are
not provided.
Camera Unit
(1) - b
(1) - b
(1)
(1)
(1)
CN1001
(1)
b
3mm
Metal
M1.7
CN1201
CN891
(ZR70 MC A only)
Fig. 4-7
4-8
1-9 Separation of Main and CAC P.C.B.'s
(1) Remove one screw (b × 1), disconnect the CN1101 and CN1002 (B to B) and detach the CAC P.C.B.
(2) Remove three screws (b × 3), disconnect the CN300, CN301, CN302, CN303, and CN2000 and detach the MAIN P.C.B.
(3) Detach the soldered part on the PM Shield 1 and detach the HA Shield and PM Shield 1 and 2.
DMC III
HA Shield
(2)
MAIN P.C.B.
CN301
Solder
(2) - b
(2)
PM
Shield 1
CN2000
(3)
CN300
CN303
(3)
(2) - b
PM
Shield 2
(1)
CN302
CN1101
(B to B)
b
CN1002
(B to B)
(2) - b
(1) - b
3mm
Metal
M1.7
CAC P.C.B.
Fig. 4-8
4-9
1-10 Separation of Recorder Holder
(1) Remove three screws (e × 3) and detach the Recorder Holder, vibration isolating Rubber and Spring.
Note : When placing the DMC III mechanical unit with the recorder holder removed, be sure to orient the drum side
upward. Take care not to touch the tape running surface of the drum.
(1) Before mounting the Recorder Holder, make sure that three vibration isolating Rubber parts have been attached properly.
(2) When using the vibration isolating Rubber parts supplied for repair service, apply HANAL KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) to the entire
surface of each vibration isolating Rubber part.
(3) Attach the Spring as illustrated below.
(4) Attach UL Tape as illustrated below to secure the Flexible Cable.
DMC III
Recorder Holder
(1)
Rubber
Spring
(1) - e
Rubber
e
3.4mm
Metal
M1.4
CAUTION
Be sure to place the unit with
its drum facing upward.
Rubber
(1) - e
Spring
Fig. 4-9
4-10
UL Tape (9 × 15)
1-11 Separation of Front Cover Unit
(1) Remove three screws (d × 3) and detach the Lens Cover, L Jack Cover and F Jack Cover.
(2) Remove two screws (d × 2) and detach the Microphone Cover, Rubber, Microphone Ass'y and Microphone Shield.
(1) Treat the Microphone Ass'y Cable as illustrated below.
Front Cover Unit
(2) - d
(1) - d
L Jack Cover
(1)
Black/
Red
Black/
Rubber
White
MIC Holder
(1)
MIC Ass'y
(2)
MIC Shield
(1)
Lens Cover
F Jack Cover
d
Black/Red
4.5mm
Black/White
Take care to make the four cables come
out of the front cover in line so as to
prevent them from crossing each other.
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-10
4-11
1-12 Disassembling of Left Cover Unit - 1
(1) Remove four screws (d × 4) and detach the Operation Key Ass'y.
(2) Remove the Shaft and detach the Hand Strap.
(3) Remove one screw (d × 1) and detach the Change Plate and Change Knob. (Only for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
(1) Attach the Change Knob, Change Plate and Operation Key Ass'y Change SW as illustrated below.
(Only for ZR70 MC A, ZR65MC A)
<Instruction for Supplies>
Change Plate part on Left Cover : HANAL FL-778 (DY9-3026-000) (Only for ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A)
ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A only
Change Knob
Change Plate
Hand Strap
Operation Key Ass'y
(3) - d
(1)
(1) - d
(2)
Shaft
d
4.5mm
(1) - d
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Instruction for Supplies
(ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A only)
(1) - d
(ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A only)
Change Knob
Change SW
Change Plate
Hanal FL-778
Fig. 4-11
4-12
(1) Remove two screws (f × 2) and detach the GND Plate, Cushion, Speaker Holder and Speaker Ass'y.
(2) Remove one screw (i × 1) and detach the EJECT P.C.B.
(1) Run the Speaker Ass’y cable under the GND Plate and secure it with the Cushion as illustrated below. Extend the cable to the
underside of the line on the Left Cover.
Speaker Ass'y
(1)
Speaker Holder
EJECT P.C.B.
(2)
(1) - f
(1)
Cushion
(2) - i
(1) - f
GND Plate
Extend the cable to
the underside of the line.
White
Black
i
f
2.5mm
4mm
Black
M1.7
(self tap)
Metal
M1.7
GND Plate
Speaker
Align the cushion with the end of
rib and the end of plate.
Fig. 4-12
4-13
(1) Remove four screws (i × 4) and detach the Cassette Cover while taking care of the two claw parts.
(2) Remove three screws (f × 3) and detach the Cassette Arm Ass'y.
(3) Detach the Open Knob.
Cassette Cover
Claw
(1) - i
Left Cover
Cassette Arm Ass'y
(3)
(2) - f
(1) - i
Claw
(1)
(1) - i
Open Knob
(2) - f
(2)
f
4mm
Black
M1.7
(self tap)
i
2.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(2) - f
Fig. 4-13
4-14
1-15 Separation of LCD Unit
(1) Disconnect the CN101.
(2) Open and turn the LCD Unit, remove four screws (c × 2, d × 2) and detach the LCD Unit.
(1) For the DSW Cable, provide wiring arrangement as shown below.
CN101
(1)
(2)
CN101
(2) - c
LCD Unit
(2)
DSW Cable
Hook the cable
over the both
ends of the
DSW2 P.C.B.
c
d
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(2) - d
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-14
4-15
1-16 Disassembling of Right Cover Unit - 1
(1) Detach the Lithium Battery Cover.
(2) Remove four screws (h × 4), disconnect the CN4002 and detach the Card P.C.B. and AP Knob.
(1) Bend the Flexible cable and secure it with UL Tape as illustrated below. Hook the right edge of the CARD P.C.B. to the Claw part
A for mounting.
(2) In remounting, engage the SW4004 knob on the CARD P.C.B. with the AP Knob.
Note on Reassembling (1) Claw A
CARD P.C.B.
Lithium Battery Cover
(1)
Claw A
(2)
CN4002
AP Knob
(2)
(2) - h
(2)
h
SW4004
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
CARD P.C.B.
Fig. 4-15
4-16
(2) - h
(1) Remove the Cushion.
(2) Remove two screws (g × 1, h × 1), disconnect the CN100 and detach the R-Key Backlight Ass'y and R-Key Backlight Holder.
(Only for ZR70 MC A)
Note : List the R-Key Backlight Ass’y while pressing the part A of R-Key Backlight Holder outward, and slide the ass’y
to detach it while taking care not to damage the Flexible Cable.
(1) Attach the Cushion at the position as illustrated below.
CN100
ZR70 MC A only
R-KEY Back Light Holder
(2)
(2)
R-KEY
Back Light Ass'y
(2) - h
(2)
(1)
Cushion
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
(2) - g
Cushion
Shorter cushion
for ZR65 MC A,
ZR60 A
(Same affixing
position)
g
Metal
M1.7
Caution
DSW2 P.C.B.
h
2mm
R-KEY
Back Light Ass'y
Part A
Align the cushion
with the step
difference surface.
Align the cushion with the rib surface.
FPC
Fig. 4-16
4-17
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
(1) Remove nine screws (d × 3, g × 4, j × 2) and the two soldered parts A and detach the R-Key P.C.B., DSW2 P.C.B., Holders 1 and
2, GND Plates 1 and 2 and Card Cover Lock.
(1) Treat the DSW2 P.C.B. cable as illustrated below. Hook the top of the DSW2 P.C.B. to the Claw part B for mounting.
(2) Treat the R-Key P.C.B. flexible cable as illustrated below.
When using the part supplied for repair service, bend the flexible cable part A to 45°.
(3) Attach UL Tape at the position indicated in the figure shown below. (Only for ZR70 MC A)
(ZR70 MC A only)
UL Tape
(5 × 10)
Attach UL Tape
according to the profile of the Connector.
(1)
UL Tape (5 × 10)
(1) - g
R-KEY
P.C.B.
Claw B
Soldered
Parts A
(1) - g
(1) - d
Holder 1
(1)
Holder 2
(1)
(1) - g
(1) - d
DSW2 P.C.B.
(1) - d
GND Plate 1
(1) - j
Card Cover Lock
Flexible Cable
Plate 1
part A
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
only
DSW2
P.C.B.
Claw B
GND Plate 2
(1) - j
d
g
4.5mm
Take care to prevent
the cable from hanging
over the boss part.
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
j
2mm
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 4-17
4-18
5.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Hold the flexible cable
part A with the plate.
(1) Remove one screw (j × 1) and detach the LCD Lock Holder, LCD Lock, LCD Open Knob, LCD Lifter, and Spring 1and 2.
(1) With both ends of spring 2 engaged with the Hook, assemble the LCD Lock into the Right Cover Unit. Then, after mounting the
LCD Lock Holder, remove the part A from the Hook.
Note : (1) If the part-A side is not removed from the Hook, the specified level of spring pressure is not provided at the
LCD Lock.
(2) If the part is not unhooked after reassembling the LCD lock holder, the LCD lock could be detached from
the right cover unit.
LCD Open Knob
(1)
(1)
LCD Lock Holder
(1)
(1) - j
LCD Lifter
Spring 1
(1)
LCD Lock
Spring 2
Part A
j
5.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Spring 2
Fig. 4-18
4-19
1-20 Disassembling of LCD Unit - 1
(1) Remove three screws (b × 3) and detach the LCD Top Cover.
Note : When detaching the LCD Top Cover, be careful of the claw parts A and B inside the cover.
(2) Disconnect the CN901 and CN902 and detach the Hinge Ass'y.
(1) When attaching the Hinge Ass'y, take care not to pinch the white cable of Backlight Ass'y.
(2) Before attaching the LCD Top Cover, be sure to insert the claw part A.
(3) Insert the CN901 and CN902 to their deepest positions securely, and check if there is no gap due to insufficient seating.
CN901
(2)
(2)
(1) - b
(2)
CN902
Hinge Ass'y
(1) - b
(1)
LCD Top Cover
CN901
Check that
there is no
gap due to
unseating.
CN902
(1) - b
Claw B
Claw A
b
3mm
Inside the LCD top cover
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 4-19
4-20
Hinge Ass'y
Take care not to pinch the cable.
1-21 Disassembling of LCD Unit - 2
(1) Detach the LCD Bottom Cover and Bottom Cover Sheet.
(2) Detach the soldered parts A and B, disconnect the CN903, remove one screw (b × 1) and detach the LCD P.C.B.
(3) Demount the LCD Ass'y from the Backlight Ass'y.
Note : The LCD Unit can be disassembled without detaching the Right Cover Unit.
(1) Detach the Bottom Cover Sheet by sliding it between the LCD Bottom Cover and the LCD Holder. Take care to prevent the Bottom
Cover Sheet from hanging out of the LCD Bottom Cover.
(2) Treat the Backlight Ass'y Cable as illustrated below. After performing soldering, secure the Cable with adhesive.
Securing of Backlight Ass'y Cable : DIA BOND 1663G
LCD Bottom Cover
Bottom Cover Sheet
Bottom Cover Sheet
(1)
LCD P.C.B.
Back Light Ass'y
(1)
Soldered Parts A
Soldered
Parts B
LCD Holder
(3)
LCD Ass'y
CN903
(2)
(2)
Diabond
(2) - b
b
3mm
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 4-20
4-21
Soldered Parts B
Diabond
Soldered Parts A
1-22 Separation of CVF Unit
(1) Remove UL Tape.
(2) Remove six screws (o × 4, p × 2) and detach the CVF Unit.
Note : (1) When drawing out the CVF-CAC FPC on the CVF Unit from the Rear Cover Unit, take care not to damage
the CVF-CAC.
(2) On approx. 5,000 units in the initial lot (ZR70 MC A : 1,000 units, ZR65 MC A : 2,000 units, ZR60 A : 2,000
units), four screws (o × 2, p × 2) are used for mounting the CVF unit instead of six screws (o × 4, p × 2), i.e.,
two screws (o × 2) are not used. To increase retaining strength on these units, an adhesive agent has
been applied to the four screws (o × 2, p × 2) before shipment from the factory. When removing these
screws, take care not to damage the threads of them.
(1) Attach the CVF-CAC FPC as illustrated below. Secure it with UL Tape.
(2) On approx. 5,000 units in the initial unit only (ZR70 MC A : 1,000 units, ZR65 MC A : 2,000 units, ZR60 A : 2,000 units) :
When attaching each of the screws, tighten it securely until it does not turn further without applying a new adhesive.
CVF Unit
(2)
(2) - p
Rear Cover Unit
o
(2) - o
p
3mm
Metal
M1.7
(Noji Rock)
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(Noji Rock)
(2) - p
Bend the CVF-CAC FPC.
(2) - o
(1)
Insert the
CVF-CAC FPC
into the grooves.
UL Tape
Fig. 4-21
4-22
UL Tape
(20 × 10)
1-23 Separation of Rear Cover Unit
(1) Remove four screws (h × 4) and detach the Battery Terminal Ass'y and GND Plate.
(2) Remove one screw (h × 1) and detach the DC P.C.B.
(3) Detach the Battery Eject Lever and Sring.
(1) Secure the cables of Battery Terminal Ass'y with the hooks as illustrated below.
(2) When attaching the Battery Terminal Ass'y, screw the Red, Black, White and Gray cables in this order.
Rear Cover, Spring : Apply HANAL FL-778. (DY9-3026-000)
Red
Black
Secure the cables with the hooks.
White
Gray
Secure the cables with the hooks.
Rear Cover
Spring
(3)
Battery Eject Lever
Red
GND Plate
Black
White
(1) - h
Gray
(1)
(2)
(1) - h
Hanal FL-778
Battery Terminal
Ass'y
h
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
(2) - h
DC P.C.B.
Fig. 4-22
4-23
Hanal FL-778
1-24 Disassembling of CVF Unit - 1
(1) Detach the Dust Cover, remove two screws (b × 2) and detach the CVF Bottom Cover.
(2) Remove one screw (d × 1), disengage the holes on CVF-CAC FPC from the protruded parts A and draw out the finder while taking
care not to damage the CVF-CAC FPC.
(3) Remove two screws (b × 2) and detach the CVF Hinge Ass'y.
(1) Engage the holes on CVF-CAC FPC and the protruded parts A as illustrated below.
(1) - b
(2) - d
CVF Bottom Cover
(2)
(1)
Protruded
Parts A
CVF-CAC FPC
CVF Hinge Ass'y
Finder
(3) - b
(1)
(3)
Dust Cover
CVF Top Cover
Protruded Parts A Hinge Ass'y
(2)
Lift Up
Finder
b
d
3mm
Remove
Metal
M1.7
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-23
4-24
CVF-CAC
FPC
(1) Remove two screws (d × 2) and detach the Eyepiece, CVF Lens Holder, CVF Knob, Rubber and Lens Holder.
(2) Detach the two claw parts A and detach the Lens.
(1) When attaching the Lens into the Lens Holder, take care to orient the lens correctly.
(2) When attaching the CVF Knob, attach the Lens Holder Boss as illustrated below. Be sure to attach the rubber part.
Lens Holder contacting surface : HANAL KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Rubber Top surface
: HANAL KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
(1) - d
(1) - d
Eyepiece
CVF Lens Holder
Rubber
CVF Knob
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
d
Lens
4.5mm
(1)
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Lens Holder
Claw A
CVF Inner Cover
CVF
Inner Cover
Lens Holder Lens
Rubber
Hanal KS-39M
Lens Knob
Boss
Lens Holder
Hanal KS-39M
Rubber top surface
Lens Holder contacting surface
Fig. 4-24
4-25
(1) Disconnect the CN4101 and detach the CVF-CAC FPC.
(2) Detach the three claw parts A and detach the components from the CVF P.C.B. to the Mask Plate.
(3) Detach the two claw parts B, disconnect the CN4102 and separate the CVF P.C.B., reflector and LCD Ass'y.
(1) Treat the LCD Ass'y flexible cable by inserting it into the CVF Inner Cover as illustrated below.
(2) Before using the CVF-CAC FPC supplied for repair service, securely fold it at the position illustrated below.
CVF Inner Cover
Mask Plate
CVF-CAC FPC
Cushion
Diffuser
Reflector
Claw A
(1)
LCD Ass'y
CVF
P.C.B.
(2)
Claw B
CN4101
(3)
CN4102
Folding in a crest form
Folding in a trough form
CVF-CAC FPC
DH2-5022-000
TO
CN4101
mk OR
1 03
Fig. 4-25
4-26
1-27 Disassembling of Camera Unit - 1
(1) Remove one screw (k × 1) and detach the Accessory Shoe.
Note : Lift the hooked parts of the two Dowels diagonally and detach the Shoe Base backward.
(2) Remove three screws (l × 3) and detach the Lens Holder, vibration isolating Rubber and Shield.
(1) When using the vibration isolating Rubber parts supplied for repair service, apply HANAL FL-778 (DY9-3026-000) to the entire
surface of each vibration isolating Rubber part.
(2) Attach Shield at the position indicated in the figure shown below.
Shoe Connector Ass'y
(ZR70 MC A)
Caution
Shoe Spacer
(ZR65 MC A, ZR60 A)
Dowel
Lift Up
(1) - k
Shoe Base
Dowel
Rubber
(1)
Shield
AAS FPC
(ZR70 MC A only)
Attach the shield
so that the cutout
of the shield is aligned
with the hole on the
Lens Holder
lens holder.
(Protrusion to the hole is not allowed.)
(2)
Lens Holder
Rubber
Shield
Rubber
(2) - l
k
l
3.8mm
(2) - l
Fig. 4-26
4-27
4.5mm
Metal
Black
M1.7
M1.7
Steped Screw Steped Screw
1-28 Disassembling of Camera Unit - 2
(1) Remove two screws (m × 2) and detach the CCD P.C.B., CCD Ass'y, Rubber part and Low-Pass Filter.
(2) Detach the soldered part A and detach the CCD P.C.B. and CCD Ass'y.
(1) Before attaching the CCD P.C.B., secure the P.C.B. with screws (m × 2) and perform soldering of the CCD Ass'y and CCD P.C.B.
Low-Pass Filter
Rubber
CCD Ass'y
CCD P.C.B.
(1)
(2)
m
6mm
(1) - m
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
(2)
Lens
Face thick side
toward Lens side
A
CCD
Low-Pass Filter
CCD P.C.B.
Fig. 4-27
4-28
1-29 Disassembling of Lens Unit
(1) Remove the Lens Rubber part and three screws (m × 3). Demount the Front Lens Ass'y.
(2) Remove six screws (d × 4, n × 2) and solder (α). Demount the PZ Motor, AF Motor, IG Meter Ass'y, PZ Shaft, and AF Shaft.
<Instruction for Supply>
On the AF/PZ Shaft and Guide Bar : LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000)
Instruction for Supply
(2) - n
(2) - d
PZ Shaft
AF Shaft
AF Motor
(2)
LOGENEST LAMBDA
A-74
Guide Bar × 2
(2) - α
AF Shaft
(2) - d
Gide Bar
IG Meter Ass'y
(2)
(2) - α
Front Lens Ass'y
PZ Motor
(1) - m
PZ Shaft
(2) - α
(1)
Gide Bar
m
d
4.5mm
(1) - m
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
(1) - m
Lens Rubber
Fig. 4-28
4-29
n
6mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
3.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
PARTS NO.
a
XA1-3170-507
b
XA1-7170-307
c
XA1-7170-407
d
XA4-9170-457
e
XA9-1167-000
f
XA4-9170-409
g
XA1-7170-207
h
XA4-9170-407
SYMBOL
SYMBOL
1-30 List of Screws Used
PARTS NO.
5mm
i
XA1-7170-257
M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
3mm
j
XA4-9170-557
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4mm
k
XA9-1349-000
4.5mm
l
XA9-1294-000
REMARKS
Flat Head Screw
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
Self Tap
M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)
Stepped Screw
M1.4-3.4mm (Metal)
ILLUST
3.4mm m XA4-9170-607
Self Tap
M1.7-4.0mm (Black)
4mm
n
XA4-9170-357
M1.7-2.0mm (Metal)
2mm
o
XA9-1481-000
4mm
p
XA9-1482-000
Self Tap
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4-30
REMARKS
M1.7-2.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap
M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)
Stepped Screw
M1.7-3.8mm (Metal)
ILLUST
2.5mm
5.5mm
3.8mm
Stepped Screw
M1.7-4.5mm (Black)
4.5mm
Self Tap
M1.7-6.0mm (Metal)
6mm
Self Tap
M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)
Noji Rock Screw
M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
Noji Rock Screw
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
3.5mm
3mm
4mm
1-31 List of Disassembly Photos
Front Side
Right Side
Recorder/Camera Unit
Camera Unit-1
Camera Unit-2
Front Cover Unit
4-31
Left Cover Unit
Right Cover Unit
Rear Cover Unit
4-32
2. Adjustment Procedures
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum
required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty
condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
○ : Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No.
Adjustment item
Lens
JACK
PCB
CCD
MAIN
PCB
CAC
PCB
Adjustment setting
2-2 AF section
2-2-1
CZ Automatic Adjustment
○
○
○
Product condition
2-2-2
Cam correction (AUT O)
○
○
○
Product condition
2-3 IS section
2-3-1
Gyro Offset Adjustment
○
○
2-3-2
Gyro Gain Adjustment
○
○
2-3-3
Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
○
○
○
Product condition
○
Product condition
Product condition
2-4 Camera section
2-4-1
Iris Adjustment
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-4-2
WB Adjustment (1)
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-4-3
Color Balance Adjustment
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-4-4
WB Adjustment (2)
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-4-5
WB Adjustment (3)
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-4-6
Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
○
○
○
○
Product condition
2-5
CCD Pixel Missing Compensation
○
○
2-6
Color Balance Check
○
○
Product condition
○
Product condition
Recorder system
Part name
No.
Adjustment item
MAIN
PCB
CAC
PCB
DMC
III
Adjustment setting
2-7 Recorder section
2-7-1
Setting for Destination
Product condition
○
2-7-2, 2-7-3
Y LEVEL / C LEVEL Adjustment
○
Product condition
2-7-4
AGC Initial Value Adjustment
○
Product condition
2-7-5
SWP Adjustment
○
○
Product condition
2-7-6
C. FG Adjustment
○
○
Product condition
2-7-7
Automatiac Adjustment of Reel FG
○
○
2-7-8
Flash Memory Writing
○
○
2-7-9
Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
○
○
Product condition
DMC III
2-8
T ape Path Adjustment
T ape path adjustment setting
4-33
2-2 AF Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) The sections 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are
performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Also, when section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be
executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time
upon completion of section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
(2) The result data (*) of automatic adjustment is indicated in blinking because of the design of the MI-COM system.
Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card
: Tape
Program AE
ZOOM
: Auto Mode
: Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance
: 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment
CHART
CZ adjustment chart
SPEC.
At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained. Execution of STEP 4.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Perform the cam correction.
ST EP PROCEDURE
CZ
1
1) Make the setting shown at right.
2) Perform storing.
(press the PAUSE button.)
2
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
CS Function MD ADDR DT
2
00
ST 465F
90
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
3
4
Judgment on result of adjustment
2) Perform storing.
2
08
ST
3100
↑
↑
↑
↑
2
08
RD
3100
↑
↑
RD
↑
0
08
0081
↑
↑
ST
RD
4-34
↑
Move to adjustment mode.
00
Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG
condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,
check the parts inside the lens section.
*AA Adjustment is completed (result is OK).
Perform the cam correction.
*FF Adjustment is completed (result is NG).
T ake the procedure again from the beginning.
00 Preparation for flash memory updating.
↑ Execution of flash memory updating.
↑
2-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)
CHART
CZ adjustment chart
SPEC.
Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.
(2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.
(3) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF
OFF).
(4) If the result is NG, perform 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).
MONIT OR
ST EP PROCEDURE
CAM CORRECT ION
1
2
08
ST 3101
00
2) Perform storing.
RD
*01
↑
↑
↑
Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped,
2
turn OFF the AF function.
3
2
08
ST 3202
00
WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
2) Perform storing.
RD
*02 Correction value measurement.
↑
↑
↑
Completion with DT :02.
4
2
08
ST 3104
00
2) Perform storing.
RD
*04 Correction value calculation.
↑
↑
↑
Completion with DT :04.
5
2
08
ST 3105
00
2) Perform storing.
RD
*AA Completion of correction value writing.
↑
↑
↑
Completion with DT :AA.
6
0
08
ST 0081
00 Preparation for flash memory updating.
2) Perform storing.
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑ Execution of flash memory updating.
4-35
2-3 IS Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status.
(2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench.
(3) Each of the adjustment data (2-3-1 and 2) becomes valid when 2-3-3 data writing is made. After completion of each adjustment, be
sure to carry out 2-3-3 before turning power OFF.
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment
SPEC.
Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
ST EP PROCEDURE
GYRO OFFSET
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 320D 00
RD
*02
↑
↑
↑
Adjustment is completed.
Completion with DT :02, NG with DT :03
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment
SPEC.
Data Writing
Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
GYRO GAIN
1
Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1
2) Perform storing.
2
Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment
2-1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
↑
↑
2
08
↑
↑
ST
RD
3200
91
↑
↑
ST
RD
3201
75
↑
↑
4-36
2-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
SPEC.
Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (2-3-1 and 2) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
ST EP PROCEDURE
EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING
1
2) Perform storing.
2
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 320F
00
RD
*02
↑
↑
↑
0
08
↑
↑
ST
RD
0081
00
↑
↑
4-37
Completion of virtual EEPROM writing.
Preparation for flash memory updating.
Execution of flash memory updating.
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment
Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 2-4-6. If power must be
turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 2-4-6.
(2) The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card
Program AE
: Tape
: Auto Mode
AF
Image stabilizer
: OFF
: OFF
Chart
: Standard angle of view (Set the angle after setting the high address.)
2-4-1 Iris Adjustment
CHART
Light box (5600°K)
SPEC.
Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.
ST EP PROCEDURE
IRIS
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 3000
00
WR
↑
↑
↑
↑ Adjustment is in progress.
RD
* ↑ Adjustment is completed.
↑
↑
↑
Completion with DT :00 (In addition, NG)
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)
CHART
Light box (5600°K)
SPEC.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
ST EP PROCEDURE
WB (1)
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 3002
00
WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
*05
↑
↑
↑
Adjustment is in progress.
Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment described in 2-4-3.
4-38
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment
CHART
Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side)
M.EQ.
Vectorscope
TP/TRIG.
VIDEO OUT
SPEC.
FR 1st microcomputer only
R : × 1.7 (ratio to burst) 90°, Ye : × 1.0 (ratio to burst) 195°
FR 2nd microcomputer and subsequent R : × 2.0 (ratio to burst) 90°, Ye : × 1.0 (ratio to burst) 180°
* For the FR 1st computer, the camera program version indication (CA) is “C200”.
* For the FR 2nd computer and subsequent, the camera program version indication (CA) is “1220”.
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
ST EP
PROCEDURE
CB (MANUAL)
R-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data.
2) Perform storing.
B-Y GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right.
2) Perform storing.
R-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right.
2) Perform storing.
B-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right.
2) Perform storing.
CS
2
↑
MONIT OR
Function MD ADDR DT
08
ST 3007 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
RD
ADJ Adjustment is completed.
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
ST
RD
3008 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
ST
RD
3009 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
ST
RD
300A "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
↑
CHART
Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter
SPEC.
Procedure)
ST EP PROCEDURE
WB (2)
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 3004
00
WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
*05
↑
↑
↑
4-39
CHART
Light box (5600°K)
SPEC.
Procedure)
ST EP PROCEDURE
WB (3)
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 3005
00
WR
↑
↑
↑
↑ Adjustment is in progress.
RD
* ↑ Adjustment is completed.
↑
↑
↑
2-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
SPEC.
Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
ST EP PROCEDURE
EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING
1
2) Perform storing.
2
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
ST 3006
00
RD
*02
↑
↑
↑
0
08
↑
↑
ST
RD
0081
00
↑
↑
4-40
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation
Notes)
(1) Perform this adjustment only if a void pixel is found on the CCD.
(2) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for 30 minutes.
(3) In this adjustment, NG is indicated if there are two or more pixel defects at the center of the screen or if there are eight or more pixel
defects on the entire screen.
Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE
: AUTO
AF
Image stabilizer
: OFF
: OFF
Demo mode
: OFF
Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
1
1-1
2
2-1
3
CCD void pixel correction
2) Perform storing.
Virtual EEPROM writing
2) Perform storing.
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
2
08
↑
↑
↑
↑
2
08
↑
↑
0
08
↑
↑
ST 300D
WR
↑
RD
↑
↑
*--
ST
RD
300E
↑
00
*02
ST
RD
0081
00
↑
↑
4-41
00
Completion with DT :00 to 0C, NG with DT :8*
2-6 Color Balance Check
Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE
: AUTO
AF
Image stabilizer
: OFF
: OFF
Demo mode
: OFF
CHART
Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart
M.EQ.
Vectorscope
TP/TRIG.
VIDEO OUT
SPEC.
R : × 2.2 102° (± 0.15 ±5°), Ye : × 1.2 167° (± 0.15 ±5°), G : 260° (±5°)
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.
(2) Perform light-box recording, and carry out WB SET using the relevant function of the product.
(3) Take an image of the color bar chart, and check that the levels of R, Ye and G are within the specified ranges respectively.
(4) If the result of the above check is NG, carry out camera section adjustment again.
4-42
2-7 Recorder Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) Each of the adjustment data (2-7-2 to 2-7-7) becomes valid when 2-7-8 flash memory writing is made. When turning power ON/
OFF during each adjustment, be sure to carry out 2-7-8 flash memory writing.
Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
2-7-1 Setting for Destination
SPEC.
Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out the setting for destination market place.
ST EP PROCEDURE
1
2
3
2) Perform storing.
2) Perform storing.
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
1
10
ST 0064
F1
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
1
10
ST
0069
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
↑
1
10
ST
0071
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
4-43
00
01
02
↑
00
01
↑
ZR70 MC A / ZR65 MC A / ZR60 A
Data writing
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
Data writing
ZR70 MC A / ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
Data writing
2-7-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG.
VIDEO OUT
M. EQ.
Oscilloscope
SPEC.
980 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Select the card VTR mode.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment.
Repeat steps 2) to 4) so that the level range shown at the right
will be attained.
* If the tape mode is selected, a delay may occur in re980 ± 20mV
sponse.
Fig. 4-29
ST EP PROCEDURE
Y LEVEL
1
2) Change data properly.
3) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
10
ST 000D ADJ White raster is output.
↑
↑
↑
↑ "ADJ"
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑ Adjustment data reflected
↑
↑
ST
↑
↑
Check level.
5) Perform storing.
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
4-44
2-7-3 C LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG.
VIDEO OUT
M. EQ.
Oscilloscope
SPEC.
710 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Select the card VTR mode.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjustment.
Repeat steps 2) to 4) so that the level range shown at the right
will be attained.
* If the tape mode is selected, a delay may occur in re-
710 ± 20mV
sponse.
Fig.4-30
ST EP PROCEDURE
C LEVEL
1
2) For adjustment, change data properly.
3) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
10
ST 000E ADJ Green raster is output.
↑
↑
↑
↑ "ADJ"
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑ Adjustment data reflected
↑
↑
ST
↑
↑
Check level.
5) Perform storing.
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
2-7-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment
SIGNAL
COLOR BAR
MODE
E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
SPEC.
Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
AGC INIT IAL
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
08
ST 0004
-WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
4-45
Automatic adjustment is in progress.
Automatic adjustment is completed.
2-7-5 SWP Adjustment
MODE
Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000)
SPEC.
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
SWP (AUT O)
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
08
ST 0001
-WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
2-7-6 C. FG Adjustment
MODE
Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000)
SPEC.
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
C.FG(AUT O)
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
08
ST 0003
-WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
2-7-7 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG
MODE
Stop without VTR cassette
Procedure)
(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.
ST EP PROCEDURE
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
08
ST 0007
-WR
↑
↑
↑
↑
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
2-7-8 Flash Memory Writing
SPEC.
Memory data writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (2-7-1 to 7) into the flash memory according the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
0
08
ST 0081
00
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
4-46
2-7-9 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE
During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC.
Power supply voltage: 5.85 ± 0.02 [V]
Note)
(1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 ± 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE
BAT T ERY VOLT AGE DROP
1
2) Perform storing.
MONIT OR
1
08
ST
-RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
4-47
2-8 Tape Path Adjustment
Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III Section.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 3-2, 3).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path adjustment.
At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%.
(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift setting to normal according to the following table (STEPS 4 : P.OFF).
ST EP PROCEDURE
MONIT OR
T RACKING T APE
1
1) Play back the tracking tape.
2
1) Set up tracking shift.
2-1
0
00
ST 9FE7
F2
2) Perform storing.
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
3) Perform 70% tracking shift by
ST
↑
↑
↑ F0~FF T he amount of tracking shift is changed.
adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF.
4) Perform storing.
RD
↑
↑
↑
↑
* DT 00 in tracking shift released
3
1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
4
1) Select the normal mode.
2) T urn off power to the main unit.
4-48
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach
the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
FR 1st MI-COM only
NTSC
R-Y
R
BURST
B-Y
Ye
FR 2nd microcomputer
and subsequent
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NTSC
R-Y
R
BURST
B-Y
Ye
4-49
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach
the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NTSC
R-Y
R
Ye
B-Y
BURST
4-50
CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST
CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Front Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4
Left Cover Unit Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Left Cover Unit Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8
Right Cover Unit Section-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-10
Right Cover Unit Section-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-12
LCD Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-14
Rear Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-16
CVF Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-18
Recorder Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-20
Camera Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-22
Lens Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-24
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-26
Accessory Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-34
Accessory Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-36
FUSE Replacement Instruction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-38
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-39
PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-40
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with
in this electrical parts list.
5-1
Casing Parts Section
1
LEFT COVER
UNIT
REAR COVER
UNIT
2×4
3
5×3
1
5
1
FRONT COVER
UNIT
4
1
1×3
1×2
8
7
5
6
CAMERA/
LENS/
RECORDER
UNIT
1×2
RIGHT COVER
UNIT
1
5-2
1
6
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
XA1-7170-307
XA1-3170-507
DA2-0436-000
D52-0220-000
XA4-9170-457
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
F
F
B
B
F
13
4
1
1
5
SCREW
SCREW
SHOE, ACCESSORY
CAP, LENS
SCREW
DESCRIPTION
6
7
8
XA1-7170-407
DA3-0299-000
DY1-8532-000
DY1-8534-000
DY1-8535-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
C
2
1
1
1
1
SCREW
CUSHION
PCB ASS’Y, JACK
PCB ASS’Y, JACK
PCB ASS’Y, JACK
5-3
REMARKS
NEW
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Front Cover Unit Section
3×2
1
3×3
2
4
8
7
6
5
5-4
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
DA3-0274-000
DA3-0281-000
DY1-8537-000
DY1-8538-000
DY1-8539-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, L JACK
COVER, L JACK
COVER ASS’Y, FRONT
ZR70
ZR60
ZR70
ZR65
ZR60
MC A,ZR65 MC A NEW
A
NEW
MC A
NEW
MC A
NEW
A
NEW
5
XA4-9170-457
DY1-8504-000
DY1-8516-000
DY1-8521-000
DY1-8503-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
B
B
B
B
5
1
1
1
1
SCREW
LENS RING ASS’Y
LENS RING ASS’Y
LENS RING ASS’Y
COVER ASS’Y, F JACK
ZR70
ZR65
ZR60
ZR70
MC A
MC A
A
MC A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SHIELD, MIC
MIC ASS’Y
RUBBER, MIC
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
6
7
8
DY1-8515-000
DY1-8520-000
DA3-0267-000
DF1-5033-000
DA3-0265-000
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
1
2
3
4
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-5
REMARKS
Left Cover Unit Section-1
*1
1
2
4
3
*1
3×2
6
5
7
8
3×2
12
9
13
10
11×2
*1 : ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A ONLY
5-6
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
DA3-0236-000
DA3-0249-000
XA4-9170-457
DG3-0055-000
DG3-0056-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
F
B
B
1
1
5(4)
1
1
DESCRIPTION
5
6
7
8
9
XA4-9170-409
WR1-5083-000
DA3-0330-000
DA3-0248-000
DA3-0234-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SCREW
SPEAKER
CUSHION
PLATE, C SUPPORT
PLATE, C LOCK
10
11
12
13
DA3-0186-000
XA1-7170-307
XA4-7170-407
DA3-0235-000
000
000
000
000
C
F
F
B
1
2
1
1
BASE, TRIPOD
SCREW
SCREW
KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN
KNOB, CHANGE
PLATE, CHANGE
SCREW
OPERATION KEY ASS’Y
5-7
REMARKS
ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A NEW
*( )ZR60 A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Left Cover Unit Section-2
1
3
4
A
2×2
5
2×2
7
8
9
2
A
6
7×3
5-8
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLASS
Q’TY
DA3-0240-000
XA1-7170-257
DA3-0226-000
DA3-0225-000
DA3-0294-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
F
B
B
B
1
5
1
1
1
STRAP,
SCREW
COVER,
COVER,
COVER,
DESCRIPTION
DA3-0296-000
DA3-0239-000
DF1-5005-000
XA4-9170-409
DY1-8502-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
F
C
1
1
1
4
1
COVER, LEFT
SHAFT, GRIP BELT
CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y
SCREW
PCB ASS’Y, EJECT
ZR60 A
DA3-0301-000 000
DA3-0303-000 000
DA3-0306-000 000
C
C
C
1
1
1
LABEL, NAME
LABEL, NAME
LABEL, NAME
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
5-9
REMARKS
HAND
CASSETTE
LEFT
LEFT
NEW
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Right Cover Unit Section-1
1
RIGHT COVER
UNIT
2
3
5×2
4
*1
LCD UNIT
6×2
5-10
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
2
3
4
DA2-1650-000
DA3-0332-000
DA3-0185-000
DA3-0180-000
DA3-0182-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
B
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
CUSHION
CUSHION
COVER, LI BATT
COVER, CARD
SHAFT, CARD COVER
5
6
XA1-7170-407 000
XA4-9170-457 000
F
F
2
2
SCREW
SCREW
1
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-11
REMARKS
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
Right Cover Unit Section-2
1
18
7
*1
6
11
2
8
9
10
2×2
4
12
1×2
17×4
16
3
2×2
19
*2
5
13
15
5
*1 : ZR70 MC A ONLY
5
14
5-12
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
XA4-9170-557
XA1-7170-207
DA3-0181-000
DY1-8533-000
DY1-8536-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
F
F
C
C
C
3
5(4)
1
1
1
DESCRIPTION
5
6
7
8
9
XA4-9170-457
DG3-0058-000
DA3-0176-000
DA3-0193-000
DA3-0179-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
B
3
1
1
1
1
SCREW
BACKLIGHT ASS’Y, R KEY ZR70 MC A
HOLDER, LCD LOCK
SPRING, LCD LIFT
LIFTER, LCD
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
10
11
12
DA3-0192-000
DA3-0175-000
DY1-8505-000
DY1-8517-000
DY1-8522-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
SPRING, LCD LOCK
LOCK, LCD
COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
13
14
15
16
DA3-0178-000
DG3-0042-000
DA3-0191-000
DG3-0037-000
DG3-0049-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
KNOB, LCD OPEN
PCB ASS’Y, D SW2
KNOB, A-P
PCB ASS’Y, CARD
PCB ASS’Y, CARD
NEW
NEW
NEW
ZR60 A
NEW
17
18
19
XA4-9170-407
XA4-7170-407
DA3-0203-000
DA3-0204-000
000
000
000
000
F
F
C
C
4
1
1
1
SCREW
SCREW
LABEL, FUSE
LABEL, FUSE
ZR70 MC A
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
SCREW
SCREW
LOCK, CARD COVER
PCB ASS’Y, R-KEY
PCB ASS’Y, R-KEY
5-13
REMARKS
*( )ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
ZR70 MC A
NEW
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
LCD Unit Section
9
8
10×2
7
6
1×3
5
4
3
2
1
5-14
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1
2
3
*1
*2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CLASS
Q’TY
XA1-7170-307
DA3-0263-000
DA3-0284-000
DA3-0287-000
DG3-0039-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
F
B
B
B
C
4
1
1
1
1
SCREW
COVER, LCD
COVER, LCD
COVER, LCD
PCB ASS’Y,
DESCRIPTION
DG1-4135-000
WG2-5210-000
DY1-8333-000
DA3-0261-000
DA3-0264-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD
LCD ASS’Y
LCD ASS’Y
HOLDER, LCD
SHEET, BOTTOM COVER
DY1-8507-000 000
DA3-0262-000 000
DA2-0399-000 000
B
B
C
1
1
2
HINGE ASS’Y
COVER, LCD BOTTOM
SHEET, LCD
TOP
TOP
TOP
LCD
*1 : Same quality as the production line.
*2 : Free from the pixel dot.
5-15
REMARKS
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Rear Cover Unit Section
8
CVF Unit
3
1
5
7×4
6
8
4
2
1×3
1
5-16
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
XA4-9170-407
DF1-5006-000
DA3-0250-000
DY1-8514-000
DA3-0251-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
B
C
B
5
1
1
1
1
SCREW
BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y
COVER, REAR
PCB ASS’Y, DC
LEVER, BATTERY EJECT
DESCRIPTION
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
6
7
8
DA3-0256-000 000
XA9-1481-000 000
XA9-1482-000 000
C
F
F
1
4
2
SPRING
SCREW
SCREW
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-17
REMARKS
CVF Unit Section
13
A
16
12
11
15
10
14
9
8
7
1
17
2
18
19
3
17×2
A
6
4×2
5
4×2
5-18
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
DA3-0215-000
DA3-0223-000
DA3-0206-000
DA3-0221-000
DG3-0057-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
B
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, DUST
COVER, DUST
COVER, CVF TOP
COVER, CVF TOP
HINGE ASS’Y, CVF
6
7
XA1-7170-307
DA3-0207-000
DA3-0222-000
DH2-5022-000
DG3-0038-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
B
B
C
C
4
1
1
1
1
SCREW
COVER, CVF BOTTOM
COVER, CVF BOTTOM
FPC, CVF-CAC
PCB ASS’Y, CVF
8
9
10
11
12
DA3-0218-000
DA3-0217-000
DA3-0219-000
WG2-5241-000
DA3-0216-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
REFLECTOR, CVF
CUSHION, CVF PANEL
DIFFUSER, CVF
LCD ASS’Y, CVF
PLATE, MASK
NEW
NEW
NEW
13
14
15
16
17
DA3-0208-000
YN1-3111-000
DA3-0211-000
DA3-0212-000
XA4-9170-457
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
F
1
1
1
1
3
COVER, CVF INNER
LENS, EYEPIECE
HOLDER, CVF LENS
RUBBER, EYE PIECE
SCREW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
18
19
DA3-0210-000 000
DA2-1840-000 000
C
C
1
1
KNOB, CVF
RUBBER, CVF KNOB
NEW
1
2
3
4
5
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-19
REMARKS
ZR70
ZR60
ZR70
ZR60
MC A,ZR65 MC A NEW
A
NEW
MC A,ZR65 MC A NEW
A
NEW
NEW
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Recorder Unit Section
CAMERA/LENS
UNIT
1
4×3
12×2
5
6×3
7
9
2
3
12×3
11
8
10
12
5-20
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
DY1-8499-000
DA1-9903-000
DA3-0160-000
DA1-9779-000
DA2-0314-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
3
1
RECORDER UNIT, DMC III
LABEL, S CHASSIS
HOLDER, RECORDER
RUBBER, INSULATION
SPRING, PLATE
6
7
8
9
XA9-1167-000
DA3-0161-000
DA3-0162-000
DY1-8510-000
DY1-8518-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
C
3
1
1
1
1
SCREW
SHIELD CASE, HA
SHIELD CASE, PM 1
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
DY1-8524-000
DA3-0163-000
DY1-8512-000
XA1-7170-307
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
F
1
1
1
6
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
SHIELD CASE, PM 2
PCB ASS’Y, CAC
SCREW
10
11
12
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-21
REMARKS
NEW
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Camera Unit Section
1
*1
1
9
2
3
10×2
8
7
*2 4
LENS
UNIT
6
5
11
13
12
14×3
15×3
5-22
*1, 2 : ZR70 MC A ONLY
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
2
3
4
DG1-7296-000
DA2-1645-000
XA9-1349-000
DA2-1622-000
DH2-5026-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
F
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
SPACER, SHOE
SCREW
RUBBER, INSULATION
FPC, AAS-CAC
5
6
7
8
9
DA2-1641-000
DH9-0877-000
DA2-1526-000
DY1-8508-000
DG3-0043-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
C
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
RUBBER, LENS
FILTER, IR
RUBBER, INSULATION
CCD ASS’Y
PCB ASS’Y, CCD
10
11
12
13
14
XA4-9170-607
DH2-5025-000
DA3-0165-000
DA3-0164-000
DA2-1524-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
C
2
1
1
1
3
SCREW
FPC, CCD-CAC
CUSHION, CCD
SHEET, SHIELD
RUBBER, INSULATION
15
XA9-1294-000 000
F
3
SCREW
1
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-23
REMARKS
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
ZR70 MC A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
Lens Unit Section
(6)×2
(8)
10
(5)
(8)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(6)×2
(2)
(3)
(1)×3
5-24
(9)
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
XA4-9170-607
YH8-0122-000
YG9-6000-000
YG9-5999-000
YG1-0154-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
C
C
C
3
1
1
1
1
SCREW
IG METER UNIT
SHAFT, PZ
SHAFT, AF
MOTOR, AF
DESCRIPTION
6
7
8
9
10
XA4-9170-457
YG9-6001-000
XA4-9170-357
YG1-0153-000
DG1-4518-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
C
F
C
B
4
2
2
1
1
SCREW
PHOTO, INTERRUPTER
SCREW
MOTOR, PZ
LENS ASS’Y
5-25
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
DMC III
Mechanical Chassis Section-1
1
3
9
3×3
2
4
5
7
6
8
5-26
DMC III
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
DG1-4506-000
XA1-7140-147
DA2-2138-000
DY1-8500-000
DA2-2139-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
E
C
1
1
4
1
1
COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE
SCREW, CROSS-RECESS, PH
SCREW
DRUM ASS’Y
WASHER
NEW
6
7
8
9
DF1-1703-000
DA2-2116-000
DA2-2115-000
DY1-8501-000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
B
1
1
1
1
IDLER ASS’Y
SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
SCREW
CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-27
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
NEW
DMC III
1
3
2
1
4
9
5
6
11
10
7
8
12
6
13
5-28
DMC III
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
DA2-0645-000
DG1-4504-000
DS1-0193-000
DF1-1693-000
DF1-1694-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
2
1
1
1
1
WASHER
REEL ASS’Y, S
SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION
RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION
DESCRIPTION
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
6
7
8
9
10
DA2-2139-000
DF1-1704-000
DS1-0199-000
DG1-4505-000
DA2-2220-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
2
1
1
1
1
WASHER
BRAKE ASS’Y, S
SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
REEL ASS’Y, T
LEVER, EJECT
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
11
12
13
DA2-2238-000 000
DS1-0198-000 000
DF1-1695-000 000
C
C
C
1
1
1
BRAKE, MAIN T
SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-29
REMARKS
DMC III
1
2×2
(5)
(4)
3
8
(6)
2×3
9
2×2
(7)
11
12
13
2
10
5-30
DMC III
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
DG1-4502-000
DA2-2261-000
DG1-4497-000
DF1-1687-000
DF1-1688-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
8
1
1
1
MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING
SCREW
GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y
ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S
ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T
DESCRIPTION
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
6
7
8
9
10
DA2-0780-000
DF1-1686-000
DA2-2259-000
DG1-4503-000
XA1-7140-147
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SCREW
DRUM BASE ASS’Y
SCREW
MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN
NEW
NEW
NEW
11
12
13
DG1-4500-000 000
DA2-2139-000 000
DS1-0192-000 000
C
C
C
1
1
1
ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH
WASHER
SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-31
REMARKS
DMC III
1
3
8
4
9
5
2
6
7
10
5-32
DMC III
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
DA2-2191-000
XA1-7140-147
DA2-2196-000
DA2-2197-000
DA2-2190-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
LEVER, CAM
BELT, TIMING
GEAR, PULLEY
GEAR, CONNECT
DESCRIPTION
NEW
6
7
8
9
10
DA2-2140-000
DA2-2188-000
DA2-2139-000
DA2-2195-000
DG1-4501-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
WASHER
GEAR, WHEEL
WASHER
GEAR, CAPSTAN
CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-33
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
NEW
Accessory Section-1
CG-570
N.S. (Product available)
CA-570
1
CB-570
2
SDC-8M
N.S.
(Commercially availabel.
Make copy sample pictures if necessary.)
JPN
A
E
PLUG TYPE
B
AS
3
BP-511/512/522/535
WL-D79A
WL-D80A
5
WIDE ATTACHMENT
4
ZR70 MC A ONLY
5-34
(7)
(6)
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
DY1-8531-000
D82-0642-000
D55-0170-000
DY1-8242-000
DY1-8303-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
DC CABLE
CORD, AC(A)
WIDE ATTACHMENT
COVER, TERMINAL BP-511(BROWN)
COVER, TERMINAL BP-522(GRAY)
5
D83-0622-000 000
C
1
WL-79A WIRELESS CONTROLLER
6
D83-0652-000 000
DY1-8528-000 000
DY1-8121-000 000
C
C
C
1
1
1
WL-80A WIRELESS CONTROLLER
COVER BATTERY
COVER BATTERY
ZR70 MC A,
ZR65 MC A
ZR60A
WL-D79A
WL-D80A
DY1-8530-000 000
DY1-8119-000 000
C
C
1
1
LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLRE(A)
WL-D79A
WL-D80A
7
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
5-35
REMARKS
PLUG TYPE A
ZR70 MC A
BP-511/512
BP-522/535
Accessory Section-2
WD-30.5
DM-50
5
2
4
1
TL-30.5
5
VL-3
IFC-300PCU
4
FS-30.5
3
6
SS-800
5-36
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
CLASS
Q’TY
1
2
3
4
5
DY1-8246-000
DY1-8247-000
DY1-8245-000
DY4-4764-000
DY4-4765-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
E
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
WIND SCREEN, FRONT
WIND SCREEN, REAR
LAMP, HAROGEN
CAP, CONVERTER(FRONT)
CAP, CONVERTER(REAR)
DESCRIPTION
6
D81-1430-000 000
C
1
SHOULDER STRAP SS-800
5-37
REMARKS
FUSE Replacement Instruction
CAUTION - For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU1801, FU3201, FU3204, FU3205
only with same type : 494001 1.0A-50V FUSE and replace FU3202, FU3203 only same
type : 49401.5 1.5A-50V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.
CN300
CN303
CN301
CN2000
CN302
CN891
CN102
IC300
CN101
IC103
IC301
CN2101
IC100
CN100
IC1802
IC102
CN990
IC2100
IC3204
CN3202
CN1101
CN3201
CN2900
CN2501
MAIN P.C.B.
FU1801
FU3205
FU3201
FU3202
FU3204
FU3203
5-38
ELECTRICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
PART NO.
MAIN P.C.B ASS’Y
CN100 VS1-6596-033
CN101 VS1-5988-010
CN300 VS1-5817-011
CN302 VS1-7005-018
CLASS
Q’TY
DESCRIPTION
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
33p
10p
11p
18p
CN303
CN891
CN2101
CN2501
FU1801
VS1-6851-021
VS1-5988-009
VS1-6851-039
WS1-6098-000
VD7-2241-001
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR 21p
CONNECTOR 9p
CONNECTOR 39p
CONNECTOR, DV
CHIP FUSE
FU3201
FU3202
FU3203
FU3204
FU3205
VD7-2241-001
VD7-2241-501
VD7-2241-501
VD7-2241-001
VD7-2241-001
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CHIP
CAC P.C.B ASS’Y
CN1001 VS1-6228-015 000
CN1201 VS1-6851-021 000
CN1501 VS1-6851-023 000
C
C
C
1
1
1
CONNECTOR 15p
CONNECTOR 21p
CONNECTOR 23p
JACK P.C.B ASS’Y
CN1 WS1-5716-000
CN2 WS1-5524-000
CN3 WS1-6004-000
CN4 WS1-6104-000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
JACK,
JACK,
JACK,
JACK,
VS1-6851-039 000
C
1
CONNECTOR 39p
CN7
5-39
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
MIC
MINI AV
USB
S-VIDEO
NEW
NEW
PARTS LIST
PAGE
CLASS
Q’TY
3
35
37
35
35
D52-0220-000
D55-0170-000
D81-1430-000
D82-0642-000
D83-0622-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
CAP, LENS
NEW
WIDE ATTACHMENT
ZR70 MC A
SHOULDER STRAP SS-800
CORD, AC(A)
PLUG TYPE A
WL-79A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ZR70 MC A,ZR65 MC A
35
21
21
21
15
D83-0652-000
DA1-9779-000
DA1-9903-000
DA2-0314-000
DA2-0399-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
3
1
1
2
WL-80A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ZR60A
RUBBER, INSULATION
LABEL, S CHASSIS
SPRING, PLATE
SHEET, LCD
3
29
31
23
23
DA2-0436-000
DA2-0645-000
DA2-0780-000
DA2-1524-000
DA2-1526-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
C
1
2
1
3
1
SHOE, ACCESSORY
WASHER
SCREW
RUBBER, INSULATION
RUBBER, INSULATION
23
23
23
11
19
DA2-1622-000
DA2-1641-000
DA2-1645-000
DA2-1650-000
DA2-1840-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
RUBBER,
RUBBER,
SPACER,
CUSHION
RUBBER,
DA2-2115-000
DA2-2116-000
DA2-2138-000
DA2-2139-000
DA2-2140-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
4
5
1
SCREW
SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
SCREW
WASHER
WASHER
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
33
33
33
33
33
DA2-2188-000
DA2-2190-000
DA2-2191-000
DA2-2195-000
DA2-2196-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
GEAR, WHEEL
GEAR, CONNECT
LEVER, CAM
GEAR, CAPSTAN
BELT, TIMING
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
33
29
29
31
31
DA2-2197-000
DA2-2220-000
DA2-2238-000
DA2-2259-000
DA2-2261-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
8
GEAR, PULLEY
LEVER, EJECT
BRAKE, MAIN T
SCREW
SCREW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
21
21
21
21
23
DA3-0160-000
DA3-0161-000
DA3-0162-000
DA3-0163-000
DA3-0164-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
HOLDER, RECORDER
SHIELD CASE, HA
SHIELD CASE, PM 1
SHIELD CASE, PM 2
SHEET, SHIELD
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
23
13
13
13
13
DA3-0165-000
DA3-0175-000
DA3-0176-000
DA3-0178-000
DA3-0179-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
CUSHION, CCD
LOCK, LCD
HOLDER, LCD LOCK
KNOB, LCD OPEN
LIFTER, LCD
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
11
13
11
11
7
DA3-0180-000
DA3-0181-000
DA3-0182-000
DA3-0185-000
DA3-0186-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, CARD
LOCK, CARD COVER
SHAFT, CARD COVER
COVER, LI BATT
BASE, TRIPOD
13
13
13
13
13
DA3-0191-000
DA3-0192-000
DA3-0193-000
DA3-0203-000
DA3-0204-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
KNOB, A-P
SPRING, LCD LOCK
SPRING, LCD LIFT
LABEL, FUSE
LABEL, FUSE
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
19
19
19
19
19
DA3-0206-000
DA3-0207-000
DA3-0208-000
DA3-0210-000
DA3-0211-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, CVF TOP
COVER, CVF BOTTOM
COVER, CVF INNER
KNOB, CVF
HOLDER, CVF LENS
NEW
NEW
NEW
27
27
27
27,29,31,33
33
DESCRIPTION
5-40
INSULATION
LENS
SHOE
REMARKS
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
ZR70 MC A
CVF KNOB
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
PARTS LIST
PAGE
CLASS
Q’TY
19
19
19
19
19
DA3-0212-000
DA3-0215-000
DA3-0216-000
DA3-0217-000
DA3-0218-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
RUBBER, EYE PIECE
COVER, DUST
PLATE, MASK
CUSHION, CVF PANEL
REFLECTOR, CVF
DESCRIPTION
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
19
19
19
19
9
DA3-0219-000
DA3-0221-000
DA3-0222-000
DA3-0223-000
DA3-0225-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
DIFFUSER, CVF
COVER, CVF TOP
COVER, CVF BOTTOM
COVER, DUST
COVER, LEFT
ZR60
ZR60
ZR60
ZR70
9
7
7
7
9
DA3-0226-000
DA3-0234-000
DA3-0235-000
DA3-0236-000
DA3-0239-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
B
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, CASSETTE
PLATE, C LOCK
KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN
KNOB, CHANGE
SHAFT, GRIP BELT
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
9
7
7
17
17
DA3-0240-000
DA3-0248-000
DA3-0249-000
DA3-0250-000
DA3-0251-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
STRAP,
PLATE,
PLATE,
COVER,
LEVER,
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
17
15
15
15
15
DA3-0256-000
DA3-0261-000
DA3-0262-000
DA3-0263-000
DA3-0264-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
B
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
SPRING
HOLDER, LCD
COVER, LCD BOTTOM
COVER, LCD TOP
SHEET, BOTTOM COVER
5
5
5
5
15
DA3-0265-000
DA3-0267-000
DA3-0274-000
DA3-0281-000
DA3-0284-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
RUBBER, MIC
SHIELD, MIC
COVER, L JACK
COVER, L JACK
COVER, LCD TOP
NEW
NEW
ZR60 A
NEW
ZR65 MC A
NEW
15
9
9
3
9
DA3-0287-000
DA3-0294-000
DA3-0296-000
DA3-0299-000
DA3-0301-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, LCD TOP
COVER, LEFT
COVER, LEFT
CUSHION
LABEL, NAME
ZR60 A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
9
9
7
11
31
DA3-0303-000
DA3-0306-000
DA3-0330-000
DA3-0332-000
DF1-1686-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
LABEL, NAME
LABEL, NAME
CUSHION
CUSHION
DRUM BASE ASS’Y
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
31
31
29
29
29
DF1-1687-000
DF1-1688-000
DF1-1693-000
DF1-1694-000
DF1-1695-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S
ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T
BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION
RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION
REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
27
29
9
17
5
DF1-1703-000
DF1-1704-000
DF1-5005-000
DF1-5006-000
DF1-5033-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
IDLER ASS’Y
BRAKE ASS’Y, S
CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y
BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y
MIC ASS’Y
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
15
31
31
33
31
DG1-4135-000
DG1-4497-000
DG1-4500-000
DG1-4501-000
DG1-4502-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD
GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y
ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH
CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN
MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
31
29
29
27
25
DG1-4503-000
DG1-4504-000
DG1-4505-000
DG1-4506-000
DG1-4518-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN
REEL ASS’Y, S
REEL ASS’Y, T
COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE
LENS ASS’Y
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
5-41
HAND
C SUPPORT
CHANGE
REAR
BATTERY EJECT
REMARKS
A
A
A
MC A
ZR70 MC A
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A,ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
PARTS LIST
PAGE
*2
CLASS
Q’TY
23
13
19
15
13
DG1-7296-000
DG3-0037-000
DG3-0038-000
DG3-0039-000
DG3-0042-000
PART NO.
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
PCB ASS’Y, CARD
PCB ASS’Y, CVF
PCB ASS’Y, LCD
PCB ASS’Y, D SW2
DESCRIPTION
ZR70 MC A
NEW
NEW
NEW
23
13
7
7
19
DG3-0043-000
DG3-0049-000
DG3-0055-000
DG3-0056-000
DG3-0057-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
B
B
C
1
1
1
1
1
PCB ASS’Y, CCD
PCB ASS’Y, CARD
HINGE ASS’Y, CVF
NEW
ZR60 A
NEW
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
13
19
23
23
23
DG3-0058-000
DH2-5022-000
DH2-5025-000
DH2-5026-000
DH9-0877-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
B
1
1
1
1
1
BACKLIGHT ASS’Y, R KEY
FPC, CVF-CAC
FPC, CCD-CAC
FPC, AAS-CAC
FILTER, IR
ZR70 MC A
31
29
29
29
35
DS1-0192-000
DS1-0193-000
DS1-0198-000
DS1-0199-000
DY1-8119-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLRE(A) WL-D80A
35
35
37
37
37
DY1-8121-000
DY1-8242-000
DY1-8245-000
DY1-8246-000
DY1-8247-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
E
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
COVER BATTERY
COVER, TERMINAL BP-511(BROWN) BP-511/512
LAMP, HAROGEN
WIND SCREEN, FRONT
WIND SCREEN, REAR
35
15
21
27
27
DY1-8303-000
DY1-8333-000
DY1-8499-000
DY1-8500-000
DY1-8501-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
C
E
B
1
1
1
1
1
COVER, TERMINAL BP-522(GRAY) BP-522/535
LCD ASS’Y
RECORDER UNIT, DMC III
DRUM ASS’Y
CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE
NEW
NEW
9
5
5
13
15
DY1-8502-000
DY1-8503-000
DY1-8504-000
DY1-8505-000
DY1-8507-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
PCB ASS’Y, EJECT
LENS RING ASS’Y
HINGE ASS’Y
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
23
21
21
17
5
DY1-8508-000
DY1-8510-000
DY1-8512-000
DY1-8514-000
DY1-8515-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
B
1
1
1
1
1
CCD ASS’Y
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
PCB ASS’Y, CAC
PCB ASS’Y, DC
ZR70 MC A
NEW
NEW
ZR65 MC A
NEW
NEW
5
13
21
5
5
DY1-8516-000
DY1-8517-000
DY1-8518-000
DY1-8520-000
DY1-8521-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
C
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
LENS RING ASS’Y
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
LENS RING ASS’Y
ZR65
ZR65
ZR65
ZR60
ZR60
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
13
21
35
35
35
DY1-8522-000
DY1-8524-000
DY1-8528-000
DY1-8530-000
DY1-8531-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
PCB ASS’Y, MAIN
COVER BATTERY
LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
DC CABLE
ZR60 A
ZR60 A
WL-D79A
WL-D79A
3
13
3
3
13
DY1-8532-000
DY1-8533-000
DY1-8534-000
DY1-8535-000
DY1-8536-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
ZR70
ZR70
ZR65
ZR60
ZR65
5
5
5
37
37
DY1-8537-000
DY1-8538-000
DY1-8539-000
DY4-4764-000
DY4-4765-000
000
000
000
000
000
B
B
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
CAP, CONVERTER(FRONT)
CAP, CONVERTER(REAR)
5-42
ASS’Y,
ASS’Y,
ASS’Y,
ASS’Y,
ASS’Y,
JACK
R-KEY
JACK
JACK
R-KEY
REMARKS
ZR70 MC A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
ZR70 MC A
ZR70 MC A
ZR70 MC A
MC A
MC A
MC A
A
A
MC
MC
MC
A
MC
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
WL-D80A
NEW
NEW
A
A
A
A,ZR60 A
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
PARTS LIST
PAGE
CLASS
Q’TY
VD7-2241-001
VD7-2241-501
VS1-5817-011
VS1-5988-009
VS1-5988-010
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
4
2
1
1
1
CHIP FUSE
CHIP FUSE
CONNECTOR 11p
CONNECTOR 9p
CONNECTOR 10p
VS1-6228-015
VS1-6596-033
VS1-6851-021
VS1-6851-023
VS1-6851-039
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
C
1
1
2
1
2
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
VS1-7005-018
WG2-5210-000
WG2-5241-000
WR1-5083-000
WS1-5524-000
000
000
000
000
000
C
B
C
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR 18p
LCD ASS’Y
LCD ASS’Y, CVF
SPEAKER
JACK, MINI AV
3
WS1-5716-000
WS1-6004-000
WS1-6098-000
WS1-6104-000
XA1-3170-507
000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
F
1
1
1
1
4
JACK, MIC
JACK, USB
CONNECTOR, DV
JACK, S-VIDEO
SCREW
27,31,33
13
9
3,7,15,19,21
3,11
XA1-7140-147
XA1-7170-207
XA1-7170-257
XA1-7170-307
XA1-7170-407
000
000
000
000
000
C
F
F
F
F
3
5(4)
5
29
4
7,13
25
13,17
7,9
3,5,7,11,13,19,25
XA4-7170-407
XA4-9170-357
XA4-9170-407
XA4-9170-409
XA4-9170-457
000
000
000
000
000
F
F
F
F
F
2(1)
2
9
5
27(26)
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
13
23,25
21
23
23
XA4-9170-557
XA4-9170-607
XA9-1167-000
XA9-1294-000
XA9-1349-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
F
F
F
F
3
5
3
3
1
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
17
17
25
25
25
XA9-1481-000
XA9-1482-000
YG1-0153-000
YG1-0154-000
YG9-5999-000
000
000
000
000
000
F
F
C
C
C
4
2
1
1
1
SCREW
SCREW
MOTOR, PZ
MOTOR, AF
SHAFT, AF
25
25
25
19
YG9-6000-000
YG9-6001-000
YH8-0122-000
YN1-3111-000
000
000
000
000
C
C
C
C
1
2
1
1
SHAFT, PZ
PHOTO, INTERRUPTER
IG METER UNIT
LENS, EYEPIECE
*1
PART NO.
15
19
7
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
15p
33p
21p
23p
39p
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
5-43
*( )ZR60 A
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
SERVO SECTION
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
LCD P.C.B. SECTION
JACK P.C.B. SECTION
LENS
UNIT
DSW2 P.C.B.
TEMP SENS
LCD UNIT
ZOOM SENS
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
LCD
FOCUS SENS
CN100
1
5
IG METER
RKEY P.C.B.
JOG FPC
1
CN101
RKEY BACK LIGHT ASS'Y
2
SHOE CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY
DMC III
MIC UNIT
RED
BLK
( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS III )
SLIDE
CHASSIS
MAIN
CHASSIS
DRUM
MOTOR
VIDEO
HEAD
LOADING
MOTOR
CN5
MIC JACK
OPERATION KEY UNIT
2
1
CN1
SPEAKER
IC1601
AV JACK
1
CN300
21 CN303 1
18
CN891
CN2
CN302
11
1
CN2000
7
1
1
1
9
EJECT SW
38 39
USB JACK
JACK
P.C.B.
CN3
1
CN102
IC103
IC301
IC1101
IC2300
IC2302
IC102
CN990
2
1
4 12
CN701
1
IC2100
S JACK
DV JACK
CN2501
IC803
A1 B1
CN2900
A10 B10
6
IC3202 IC3203
IC801
CN1101
CN100
BATTERY TERMINAL
32 33
B1 A1
B35 A35
CN4
IC1802
IC2301
1
CN6
10
2 1
IC100
IC1102
39
2 1
CN101
A1 B1
CN2101
CN7
IC1602
A15 B15
IC300
BACK LIGHT
CN301
10
1
IC2000
1
CN3202
IC3204
IC3201
1
6
3
CN3201
1
MAIN P.C.B.
WP4201
IC4201
WP4202
IC802
1
CN901
LCD P.C.B.
7
1
CN902
12
CN4002
CCD P.C.B.
14
1
HINGE ASS'Y
1
3
1
21 CN1201 1
20
2
IC1701
CN1070
IC903
15
IC902
DC P.C.B.
15
CARD P.C.B.
CN1001
2
CN1
1
1
CN903
IC901
24
DC JACK
CN4001
IC1202
IC1001
1
1
22
22 23
IC1002
CN1501
2
1
1
32 33
2
CN4101
CN4102
LCD
7
1
2
Metal contact (Pins' face down)
23 22
Metal contact (Pins' face up)
1
IC1501
B1
A1
1
CN4000
CVF P.C.B.
CAC P.C.B.
1
12
CN1502
7
:
:
1
12
CN1002
Metal contact
B35
Metal contact
A35
IC1502
SD CARD
1
7
01
Feb. 2003
C
CANON INC. 2003
MAIN P.C.B.
CN100
1 GND
2 CARD DAT2
3 CARD CMD
4 CARD DAT3
5 GND
6 DVDD 3V
7 CHAGE LED
8 GND
9 CARD SCK
10 GND
11 GND
12 CARD ACC LED
13 CARD DAT
14 CARD VSS1
15 CARD DAT1
16 VTR UNREG
17 CARD PRO
18 PANEL B/T SW
19 CARD DET
20 KEY AD0
21 LI 3V
22 KEY AD1
23 PAE/GREEN
24 PANEL OPEN SW
25 DIAL CW
26 DIAL CCW
27 KEY AD2
28 KEY AD3
29 P5V
30 KEY LED2
31 KEY LED1
32 KEY LED0
33 KEY LED0
CN101
1 CK 3V
2 ZOOM AD
3 GND
4 PHOTO SW
5 HALF PHOTO SW
6 TAPE/CARD SW
7 GND
8 START/STOP SW
9 VTR PW SW
10 CAM PW SW
CN102
A1 MODE RESET
A2 EPM
A3 CE
A4 CNVSS
A5 N.C
A6 DEBCLK
A7 GND
A8 DEBUD
A9 GND
A10 DEBDD
A11 GND
A12 XDEBEN
A13 GND
A14 GND
A15 E3V+LI3V
B1 GND
B2 FLASH CLK
B3 FLASH RST
B4 FLASH RXD1
B5 FLASH TXD1
B6 N.C
B7 DVDD3V
B8 CG CS
B9 EEP/CG CLK
B10 EEP/CG SO
B11 DOT CLK
B12 OSD I0
B13 OSD I1
B14 VIC HD
B15 VIC VD
CN300
1 W
2 W
3 COIL COM
4 SENS GARD
5 SENS COM
6 DPG
7 DFG
8 V
9 V
10 U
11 U
CN301
1 N.C
2 DEW −
3 DEW +
4 LOAD (−)
5 LOAD (−)
6 MSW SENS
7 MSW VCC
8 MSW VSS
9 LOAD (+)
10 LOAD (+)
CN302
1 U COIL
2 U COIL
3 W COIL
4 W COIL
5 V COIL
6 V COIL
7 CH−
8 W−
9 W+
10 C H +
11 U +
12 U −
13 V +
14 V −
15 CFG2
16 CFG GND
17 CFG VCC
18 CFG1
CN303
1 BOT E
2 BOT C
3 MIC GND
4 MIC3
5 REC PRF
6 MIC2
7 MIC1
8 T IN −
9 T OUT −
10 T IN +
11 T OUT +
12 C IN
13 CIN GND
14 LED A
15 LED K
16 S IN −
17 S OUT −
18 S IN +
19 S OUT +
20 EOT E
21 EOT C
CN701
1 MIC GND R
2 INT MIC R
3 MIC GND L
4 INT MIC L
MAIN P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
CAC P.C.B.
CN891
1 SHOE UNREG
2 SHOE UNREG
3 POW GND
4 POW GND
5 ID-1
6 SPACK ON
7 ADV MIC GND
8 ADV MIC L
9 ADV MIC R
CN990
1 LCD 3V
2 LCD 5V
3 LCD 8.5V
4 LCD 15V
5 KCD −10V
6 GND
7 MO GND
8 VTR UNREG
9 PANEL XOE
10 PANEL LCK
11 LCD CS
12 LCD EEP CS
CN1101
A1 GND
A2 RAWDATA (6)
A3 RAWDATA (5)
A4 RAWDATA (4)
A5 RAWDATA (3)
A6 RAWDATA (2)
A7 GND
A8 PWM FA
A9 PWM FB
A10 PWM ZA
A11 PWM ZB
A12 Z PSB
A13 F PSB
A14 Z RES SW
A15 F RES SW
A16 GND
A17 MO GND
A18 MO GND
A19 P5V
A20 P5V
A21 VF R
A22 VF G
A23 VF B
A24 GND
A25 CSYNC
A26 GND
A27 EVF BL ON
A28 EVF 8.5V
A29 LCD 3V
A30 EVF EEP CS
A31 LCD EEP SOUT
A32 EVF SEN
A33 LCD EEP SCK
A34 EVF EEP SIN
A35 EVF 3V ON
B1 GND
B2 RAWDATA(7)
B3 RAWDATA (8)
B4 RAWDATA(9)
B5 RAWDATA(10)
B6 RAWDATA(11)
B7 GND
B8 GND
B9 GND
B10 DSP CLK
B11 GND
B12 AGC CS
B13 CAM SO
B14 CAM SCK
B15 TG RST
B16 VGATE
B17 XTGHD
B18 XTGVD
B19 XSG
B20 CAM 3V
B21 CAM 3V
B22 IRIS 3V
B23 CCD 15V
B24 CCD −7V
B25 DA LOAD
B26 LED RET
B27 I SW
B28 P GY OUT
B29 Y GY OUT
B30 TEMP
B31 P GYRO
B32 Y GYRO
B33 I ENC
B34 IRIS CL
B35 IRIS OP
CN2000
1 HA GND
2 H1A
3 H1B
4 HA GND
5 H2A
6 H2B
7 HA GND
CN2101
1 MIC GND
2 EXT L
3 EXT P DET
4 EXT R
5 MIC GND
6 MIC GND
7 P5V
8 CAM LED
9 AV GND
10 AV GND
11 V I/O/HP R
12 AV DET
13 AV GND
14 AV R
15 AV L/HP L
16 AV GND
17 AV GND
18 P GY OUT
19 RMC IN
20 CAM 3V
21 SP +
22 SP −
23 V BUS
24 GND
25 GND
26 D −
27 D +
28 GND
29 GND
30 Y GY OUT
31 EJECT SW
32 GND
33 S DET
34 Y I/O
35 YC GND
36 YC GND
37 C I/O
38 YC GND
39 N.C
CN2900
A1 V I/O
A2 GND
A3 VTR POW SW
A4 T/C POW SW
A5 CAM POW SW
A6 FCH O
A7 TCK
A8 SWP
A9 GND
A10 PBRF
B1 N.C
B2 MODE RESET
B3 VTR ON IC3201
B4 N.C
B5 MIC2
B6 MIC3
B7 TRST
B8 TMS
B9 TDI
B10 TDO
CN3201
1 DC −
2 DC +
3 DC J SW
CN3202
1 BATT E3
2 BATT INFO AD
3 BATT −
4 BATT −
5 BATT +
6 BATT +
CN1001
1 VSUB
2 V2
3 V1
4 V3
5 V4
6 GND
7 RESET
8 H1
9 H2
10 GND
11 CCD VH 15V
12 CCD VL −7.5V
13 GND
14 CCD OUT
15 GND
CN1002
A1 GND
A2 RAWDATA (6)
A3 RAWDATA (5)
A4 RAWDATA (4)
A5 RAWDATA (3)
A6 RAWDATA (2)
A7 GND
A8 PWM FA
A9 PWM FB
A10 PWM ZA
A11 PWM ZB
A12 Z PSB
A13 F PSB
A14 Z RES SW
A15 F RES SW
A16 GND
A17 MO GND
A18 MO GND
A19 P5V
A20 P5V
A21 VF R
A22 VF G
A23 VF B
A24 GND
A25 CSYNC
A26 GND
A27 EVF BL ON
A28 EVF 8.5V
A29 LCD 3V
A30 EVF EEP CS
A31 LCD EEP SOUT
A32 EVF SEN
A33 LCD EEP SCK
A34 EVF EEP SIN
A35 EVF 3V ON
B1 GND
B2 RAWDATA(7)
B3 RAWDATA (8)
B4 RAW\DATA(9)
B5 RAWDATA(10)
B6 RAWDATA(11)
B7 GND
B8 GND
B9 GND
B10 DSP CLK
B11 GND
B12 AGC CS
B13 CAM SO
B14 CAM SCK
B15 TG RST
B16 VGATE
B17 XTGHD
B18 XTGVD
B19 XSG
B20 CAM 3V
B21 CAM 3V
B22 IRIS 3V
B23 CCD 15V
B24 CCD −7V
B25 DA LOAD
B26 LED RET
B27 I SW
B28 P GY OUT
B29 Y GY OUT
B30 TEMP
B31 P GYRO
B32 Y GYRO
B33 I ENC
B34 IRIS CL
B35 IRIS OP
CN1201
1 DRIVE (+)
2 DRIVE (−)
3 HALL IN (+)
4 HALL OUT (+)
5 HALL IN(−)
6 HALL OUT (−)
7 GND
8 FOCUS A
9 FOCUS B
10 FOCUS-B
11 FOCUS-A
12 FOCUS VCC
13 ZOOM LED
14 ZOOM SENS
15 TEMP
16 FOCUS LED
17 FOCUS SENS
18 ZOOM-B
19 ZOOM B
20 ZOOM-A
21 ZOOM A
CN1501
1 XSTH
2 STH
3 CKH1
4 VSS
5 CKH2
6 VDD
7 G
8 R
9 B
10 VSS
11 DSG
12 XDSG
13 DSD
14 VBB
15 ENB
16 XENB
17 XSTV
18 STV
19 CKV2
20 CKV1
21 COM
22 BL5V
23 BL5V
CN1502
1 LCD EEP SOUT
2 LCD EEP SCK
3 EVF EEP SIN
4 C SYNC
5 PANEL R
6 PANEL G
7 PANEL B
JACK P.C.B.
CN5
1 SP +
2 SP −
CN6
1 GND
2 EJECT SW
CN7
1 YC GND
2 C I/O
3 YC GND
4 YC GND
5 Y I/O
6 S DET
7 GND
8 EJECT SW
9 Y GY OUT
10 GND
11 GND
12 D +
13 D −
14 GND
15 GND
16 VBUS
17 SP −
18 SP +
19 CAM 3V
20 RMC IN
21 P GY OUT
22 AV GND
23 AV GND
24 AV L/HP L
25 AV R
26 AV GND
27 AV DET
28 V I/O/HP R
29 AV GND
30 AV GND
31 CAM LED
32 P5V
33 MIC GND
34 MIC GND
35 EXT R
36 EXT P DET
37 EXT L
38 MIC GND
39 N.C
CARD P.C.B.
CN4000
1 MMC RSV
2 MMC CMD
3 MMC VSS1
4 MMC VDD
5 MMC CLK
6 MMC VSS1
7 MMC DAT
8 MMC DAT1
9 MMC DAT2
10 CARD PRO
11 GND
12 CARD DET
CN4001
1 KEY LED0
2 KEY LED1
3 KEY LED2
4 P5V
5 KEY AD3
6 KEY AD2
7 DIAL CCW
8 DIAL CW
9 PANEL OPEN SW
10 PAE/GREEN
11 KEY AD1
12 LI 3V
13 KEY AD0
14 CARD DET
15 PANEL B/T SW
16 CARD PRO
17 VTR UNREG
18 CARD DAT1
19 CARD VSS1
20 CARD DAT
21 CARD ACC LED
22 GND
23 GND
24 CARD SCK
25 GND
26 CHAGE LED
27 DVDD 3V
28 GND
29 CARD DAT3
30 CARD CMD
31 CARD DAT2
32 GND
33 GND
CN4002
1 MENU
2 GND
3 DIAL CW
4 DIAL CCW
5 DIAL PUSH
6 GND
7 PANEL B/T SW
8 PANEL OPEN SW
9 P5V
10 KEY LED0
11 KEY LED1
12 KEY LED2
13 KEY AD2
14 REW KEY
CVF P.C.B.
CN4101
1 BL5V
2 COM
3 CKV1
4 CKV2
5 STV
6 XSTV
7 XENB
8 ENB
9 VBB
10 DSD
11 XDSG
12 DSG
13 GND
14 B
15 R
16 G
17 VDD
18 CKH2
19 VSS
20 CKH1
21 STH
22 XSTH
23 XSTH
CN4102
1 XSTH
2 STH
3 VSS
4 CKH1
5 CKH2
6 VDD
7 CSH
8 G
9 R
10 B
11 DSG
12 XDSG
13 DSD
14 VBB
15 CSV
16 ENB
17 XENB
18 XSTV
19 STV
20 CKV2
21 CKV1
22 COM
LCD P.C.B.
CN901
1 LCD EEP SOUT
2 LCD EEP SCK
3 SIN1
4 C SYNC
5 PANEL R
6 PANEL G
7 PANEL B
CN902
1 LCD 3V
2 LCD 5V
3 LCD 8.5V
4 LCD 15V
5 LCD −10V
6 GND
7 MO GND
8 VTR UNREG
9 PANEL XOE
10 PANEL LCK
11 LCD CS
12 LCD EEP CS
CN903
1 VGL
2 N.C
3 STVR
4 U/D
5 CKV
6 DEV
7 STVL
8 VCC
9 VGH
10 VCOM
11 AVDD
12 STHR
13 L/R
14 N.C
15 VR
16 VG
17 VB
18 GND
19 CPH3
20 CPH2
21 CPH1
22 Q1H
23 OEH
24 STHL
RKEY P.C.B.
CN100
1 P5V
2 KEY LED0
3 KEY LED1
4 KEY LED2
5 N.C
CN101
1 GND
2 PANEL B/T SW
CCD P.C.B.
CN1070
1 GND
2 CCD OUT
3 GND
4 VL (−7.5V)
5 VH (+15V)
6 GND
7 H2
8 H1
9 RESET
10 GND
11 V4
12 V3
13 V1
14 V2
15 VSUB
ZR70 MC A, ZR65 MC A,
ZR60 A
CAMERA SECTION-1
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
ZR70MC A, ZR65MC A, ZR60 A
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
CCD P.C.B.
CAC P.C.B.
CCD VL
-7.5V
CAM 3V
P5V
4
V2
3
V3
2
V4
1
VDD
8
VL 11
RG
9
H1 12
H2 13
VOUT
20 VHH
VSUB
CN1070
VSUB
V1
V2
V3
V4
VH (+15V)
VL (−7.5V)
RESET
H1
H2
CCD OUT
15
13
14
12
11
5
4
9
8
7
2
1
2
3
4
5
11
12
7
8
9
14
CN1001
VSUB
V2
V1
V3
V4
CCD VH 15V
CCD VL -7.5V
RESET
H1
H2
CCD OUT
V2
V1
V3
V4
1
DSUB
3
DV2
5
DV1
IC1001
MN3112SA
V-DRIVER
17 DV3
CH1
8
IV1
7
IV2
9
CH1
IV1
IV2
ISUB
ISUB 10
IV4
IV4 12
CH2
CH2 13
IV3
IV3 14
18 DV4
RESET
CCD VH 15V
CCD VL -7.5V
H1
H2
CCD OUT
36 CH 1
D0
42 V 1
41 V 2
34 SUB
39 V 4
35 CH 2
40 V 3
27 R
28 H1
31 H2
IC1002
AN12070A
TG/CDS/AGC/AD
5
VM 1
8
VM 2
CAM 3V
VDD 12
20 CCD SW
26 DVDD3
18 VM 3
FOCUS A
FOCUS B
TO
LENS UNIT
8
9
10
11
18
19
20
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
14
15
17
13
16
CN1201
FOCUS A
FOCUS B
FOCUS −B
FOCUS −A
ZOOM −B
ZOOM B
ZOOM −A
ZOOM A
DRIVE (+)
DRIVE (−)
HALL IN (+)
HALL OUT (+)
HALL IN (−)
HALL OUT (−)
FOCUS VCC
ZOOM SENS
TEMP
FOCUS SENS
ZOOM LED
FOCUS LED
FOCUS −B
FOCUS −A
ZOOM −B
ZOOM B
ZOOM −A
ZOOM A
DRIVE (+)
CAM 3V
DRIVE (−)
HALL IN (+)
HALL OUT (+)
HALL IN (−)
HALL OUT (−)
4
9
OUT 1F
OUT 2F
7
OUT 2R
6
OUT 1R
IN 1
IC1701
BH6564FV
MOTOR DRIVE
3
IN 2 10
IN 3 21
IN 4 15
17 OUT 4R
EN 4 14
16 OUT 4F
EN 3 22
19 OUT 3R
EN 2 11
20 OUT 3F
EN 1
2
2
2
35 35
1
1
36 36
3
3
37 37
4
4
34 34
5
5
33 33
6
6
18 18
Q1201
IC1202
BH9910KV
IRIS DRIVE
27 27
28 28
19 19
29 DVDD3
PWM FA
32 DVDD3
PWM FB
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
LCD 3V
CAM 3V
RAWDATA (2)
RAWDATA (3)
IRIS 3V
CCD 15V
CCD −7V
RAWDATA (4)
RAWDATA (5)
RAWDATA (6)
RAWDATA (7)
RAWDATA (8)
RAWDATA (9)
RAWDATA (10)
RAWDATA (11)
52 CCD OUT
14 DVDD2
VH (+15V)
1
D9 10
11 DRVDD
P5V
Q1071
BUFFER
7
VDC
IC1070
ICX089AK
CCD
V1
16 VH
VH (+15V)
6
VL
CCD VH 15V
SUB 10
2
CLKO 17
CS 62
CLR 19
VCTRL 18
HD IN 16
VD IN 15
DSP CLK
AGC CS
TG RST
VGATE
XTGHD
XTGVD
37 DVDD2
PWM ZA
48 AVDD
PWM ZB
SDATA 63
50 AVDD
Z PSB
CAM 3V
59 DVDD1
SCK 64
F PSB
DA LOAD
IRIS CL
IRIS OP
I SW
P GY OUT
Y GY OUT
P GYRO
EVF 8.5V
LCD 3V
29 29
20 20
CAM 3V
15 15
30 30
21 21
10 10
P5V
46 46
9
9
IRIS 3V
45 45
8
8
Y GYRO
Q1506
CN1002
XSG
P5V
P5V
LCD 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
IRIS 3V
CCD 15V
CCD −7V
RAWDATA (2)
RAWDATA (3)
RAWDATA (4)
RAWDATA (5)
RAWDATA (6)
RAWDATA (7)
RAWDATA (8)
RAWDATA (9)
RAWDATA (10)
RAWDATA (11)
DSP CLK
AGC CS
TG RST
VGATE
XTGHD
XTGVD
PWM FA
PWM FB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
Z PSB
F PSB
CAM SO
CAM SCK
DA LOAD
IRIS CL
IRIS OP
I SW
P GY OUT
Y GY OUT
P GYRO
Y GYRO
I ENC
Z RES SW
TEMP
F RES SW
LED RET
CSYNC
VF B
VF G
VF R
LCD EEP SOUT
LCD EEP SCK
EVF SEN
EVF EEP CS
EVF EEP SIN
EVF BL ON
EVF 8.5V
EVF 3V ON
B19
A19
A20
A29
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B10
B12
B15
B16
B17
B18
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
B13
B14
B25
B34
B35
B27
B28
B29
B31
B32
B33
A14
B30
A15
B26
A25
A23
A22
A21
A31
A33
A32
A30
A34
A27
A28
A35
CN1502
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
EVF EEP SIN
LCD EEP SCK
LCD EEP SOUT
C SYNC
5
6
7
3
2
1
4
TO
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
CN1101
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
CN1101
Q1505
I ENC
CVF P.C.B.
Q4101
LCD
(CVF)
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
6
5
4
2
1
CN4102
COM
CKV1
CKV2
STV
XSTV
XENB
ENB
VBB
DSD
XDSG
DSG
B
R
G
VDD
CKH2
CKH1
STH
XSTH
Q4102
CN4101
BL5V
COM
CKV1
CKV2
STV
XSTV
XENB
ENB
VBB
DSD
XDSG
DSG
B
R
G
VDD
CKH2
CKH1
STH
XSTH
XSTH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
1
2
3
5
7
8
9
11
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
13
6
14
22
23
CN1501
XSTH
STH
CKH1
CKH2
G
R
B
DSG
XDSG
ENB
XENB
XSTV
STV
CKV2
CKV1
COM
DSD
VDD
VBB
BL5V
BL5V
XSTH
STH
CKH1
CKH2
G
R
B
DSG
XDSG
ENB
XENB
XSTV
EVF 8.5V
STV
CKV2
CKV1
Q1509 Q1507
COM
DSD
EVF 8.5V
01
Feb. 2003
17 XSTH
18 STH
RIN 53
20 CKH 1
Q1504
Q1502
19 CKH 2
43 GOUT
GIN 54
45 ROUT
BIN 55
40 BOUT
Q1503
24 DSG
23 XDSG
30 ENB
29 XENB
25 XSTV
26 STV
IC1501
LV4141W
EVF DRIVER
Q1501
HDIN 60
DATA
7
SCLK
8
LOAD
6
TO
HINGE ASS'Y
27 CKV2
28 CKV1
38 COMOUT
VCC 1 49
EVF A3V
SYNC IN 57
50 DSDOUT
VDD 1
39 VCCCOM
VDD 2 11
47 VCC 2
VDD 0 12
1
LCD 3V
2
SK
3
DI
8
VCC
IC1502
BR9020FFV-W
EEPROM
CS
1
DO
4
C
CANON INC. 2003
CAMERA SECTION-2
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
TO
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAC P.C.B.
CN1002
A19
A20
A29
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B10
B16
B17
B18
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A21
A23
A22
A25
B12
B13
B14
B15
B19
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
CN1101
P5V
P5V
LCD 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
IRIS 3V
CCD 15V
CCD −7V
RAWDATA (2)
RAWDATA (3)
RAWDATA (4)
RAWDATA (5)
RAWDATA (6)
RAWDATA (7)
RAWDATA (8)
RAWDATA (9)
RAWDATA (10)
RAWDATA (11)
DSP CLK
VGATE
XTGHD
XTGVD
PWM FA
PWM FB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
Z PSB
F PSB
Z RES SW
F RES SW
VF R
VF B
VF G
CSYNC
AGC CS
CAM SO
CAM SCK
TG RST
XSG
DA LOAD
LED RET
I SW
P GY OUT
Y GY OUT
TEMP
P GYRO
Y GYRO
I ENC
IRIS CL
IRIS OP
A9
A10/AP
BA0
BA1
152 MDATA L1
DQ2
5
MDATA L(2)
230 MDATA L2
DQ3
7
MDATA L(3)
151 MDATA L3
DQ4
8
MDATA L(4)
300 MDATA L4
DQ5 10
MDATA L(5)
64 MDATA L5
DQ6 11
MDATA L(6)
229 MDATA L6
DQ7 13
MDATA L(7)
150 MDATA L7
DQ8 74
MDATA L(8)
299 MDATA L8
DQ9 76
MDATA L(9)
228 MDATA L9
DQ10 77
MDATA L(10)
149 MDATA L10
DQ11 79
MDATA L(11)
62 MDATA L11
DQ12 80
MDATA L(12)
298 MDATA L12
DQ13 82
MDATA L(13)
227 MDATA L13
DQ14 83
MDATA L(14)
61 MDATA L14
DQ15 85
MDATA L(15)
297 MDATA L15
DQ16 31
MDATA L(16)
226 MDATA L16
DQ17 33
MDATA L(17)
147 MDATA L17
DQ18 34
MDATA L(18)
60 MDATA L18
DQ19 36
MDATA L(19)
59 MDATA L19
DQ20 37
MDATA L(20)
146 MDATA L20
DQ21 39
MDATA L(21)
58 MDATA L21
DQ22 40
MDATA L(22)
145 MDATA L22
DQ23 42
MDATA L(23)
295 MDATA L23
DQ24 45
MDATA L(24)
224 MDATA L24
DQ25 47
MDATA L(25)
57 MDATA L25
DQ26 48
MDATA L(26)
223 MDATA L26
DQ27 50
MDATA L(27)
294 MDATA L27
DQ28 51
MDATA L(28)
56 MDATA L28
DQ29 53
MDATA L(29)
143 MDATA L29
DQ30 54
MDATA L(30)
222 MDATA L30
DQ31 56
MDATA L(31)
55 MDATA L31
96 RAWDATA 2
111 PWM2
TO
IC2301
266 PWM1
194 PWM0
10 CDATA4
101 CDATA5
271 ICS0
199 ICS1
Q2302
312 VF R2
175 VF B2
Q2301
91 VF G2
69 CSYNC0
324 SCS4
13 SO3
IC2301(1/3)
MB87M1255
VIC3
100 318 183 99 317
01
Feb. 2003
7
BDATA 7
BDATA 6
BDATA 5
BDATA 4
BDATA 3
11 CDATA1
EADDR M12 288
EADDR M13 216
EADDR M14 135
EADDR M15 215
EADDR M16 287
EADDR M17 47
EADDR M18 46
EADDR M19 134
EADDR M20 214
EADDR M22 213
EDATA M0 285
EDATA M1 44
EDATA M2 132
EDATA M3 43
EDATA M5 131
EDATA M6 42
EDATA M7 211
EDATA M8 130
179 RAWDATA 5
EDATA M11 210
RAWDATA 6
EDATA M12 40
94 RAWDATA 7
EDATA M13 282
254 RAWDATA 8
EDATA M14 209
178 RAWDATA 9
EDATA M15 128
RAWDATA 10
BDATA 0 202
93 RAWDATA 11
BDATA 1 31
6
TGCLK
BDATA 2 275
7
TG HD
BDATA 3 201
182 TG VD
BDATA 4 30
VGATE
BDATA 5 119
BDATA 7 200
ADATA 0 116
WCK 149
WCLK
112 WCLK
ADATA 1 271
RDY 46
RDY
142 RDY
ADATA 2 197
LREQ 348
XEINT1
221 XEINT1
ADATA 3 25
XEINT0 283
XEINT0
54 XEINT0
ADATA 4 270
XECS5 211
XECS M
141 XECS M
ADATA 5 24
XEWRL 281
XEWRL M
292 XEWRL M
ADATA 6 23
EDREQ 133
DREQ0
281 DREQ0
ADATA 7 113
EDACK 282
XDACK0
127 XDACK0
MCCLK A 14
CARD SCK
SI3 105
XRESET
22 XRESET
MCDT A3 105
CARD DAT3
184 TDI
MCDT A2 188
CARD DAT2
276 BDATACLK
MCDT A1 263
CARD DAT1
TDO 113
TDI
CCLK 103
BDATA CLK
6
TO
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAC P.C.B.
CN1002
EDATA M4 212
IC1102
MB87M1285PBT
MACS
EDATA M9 283
8
AUD2 I
MACS I
EADDR M0 toM22
EDATA M0 to M15
XEWRU
XERD
TRST
TMS
27M
EADDR M21 133
194 LRCLK
ADATA 6
BDATA 2
186 CDATA0
EADDR M11 136
LRCLK
ADATA 5 95
217 AIN6
EADDR M9 137
EADDR M10 49
LRCK 62
ADATA 4 255
BDATA 1
18
30
EADDR M8 217
BDATA 6 274
ADATA 3 179
340 AIN5
EADDR M7 289
21 AUDO1
ADATA 2 314
BDATA 0
TO
JACK P.C.B. SECTION
JACK P.C.B.
CN7
CN2101
P GY OUT
Y GY OUT
EADDR M6 51
AUDO1
ADATA 1 315
50 AIN4
EADDR M5 218
AUD1 O 148
ADATA 0
137 AIN8
EADDR M4 290
111 AUDI2
292 C LKON
319 CDATA2
EADDR M3 139
AUDI2
12 SCLK3
185 CDATA3
EADDR M2 52
AUD1 I 227
346 D7
263 SCS8
EADDR M1 219
EDATA M10 41
2
AMCK 228
AUDI1 20
EADDR M0 291
255 RAWDATA 4
3
21 PWM3
AUDO2 258
RAWDATA 3
4
TO
MDQM L0
A8
MDATA L(1)
MDQM L1
A7
4
MDQM L2
A6
DQ1
MDQM L3
A5
CAM 3V
IRIS 3V
CCD 15V
CCD−7V
301 MDATA L0
MCLK L
A4
LCD 3V
MDATA L(0)
MCKE L
A3
P 5V
2
XMCS L
A2
IC1101
HY57V643220CT-55
SDRAM
DQ0
XMRAS L
23
XMWE L
22
XMCAS L
24
MADDR L12
66
MADDR L11
MADDR L(12)
65
MADDR L9
MADDR L(11)
64
MADDR L10
MADDR L(9)
MADDR L(10)
63
MADDR L8
MADDR L(8)
62
MADDR L7
MADDR L(7)
61
MADDR L6
MADDR L(6)
60
MADDR L5
MADDR L(5)
27
MADDR L4
MADDR L(4)
26
MADDR L3
MADDR L(3)
25
MADDR L2
MADDR L(2)
16
MADDR L1
MADDR L(1)
71
156 234 304 69 155 233 303 68 154 67 153 66 231 71 235 305 158 236 306 73 159 74 237
MADDR L0
MADDR L(0)
/CS
CLK
28
A1
/RAS
59
A0
/WE
67
DQM0
68
DQM1
20
DQM2
19
CKE
18
DQM3
17
/CAS
MAIN P.C.B.(1/6)
MCDT A0 15
CARD DAT
MCCMD A 189
CARD CMD
CARD SCK
CARD DAT3
CARD DAT2
CARD DAT1
CARD DAT
CARD CMD
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
XEWRU M 220
XERD M 53
TRST 185
TMS
9
VCLK 121
TCK 101
3
ADATA 7 178
316 182
C
CANON INC. 2003
MAIN P.C.B.(2/6)
CK 3V
2
VBAT
3
13 VIN
14 VRO
5
SW
7
VDC
IC102
BD4187FV
BACKUP
D100
CS
LI 3V
4
70
18 E3DET
Q100
SWOUT
DVDD 3V
25 LI3V DETECT
69
START/STOP SWITCH
LIDET
68
HARF PHOTO SWITCH
E3V
RESET
MICOM UNREG
12 VOUT
PHOTO SWITCH
11
E3V+LI3V
6
VTR POWER SWITCH 76
CAM POWER SWITCH 77
T/XC PW SW 78
FCHO/DEBUGO 36
DVDD3V
E3V+LI3V
EPM 39
72 CH DET
CE 44
CNVSS
7
FLASH CLK 31
FLASH RTS 32
FLASH RXD1 30
FLASH TXD1 29
IC103
BD4746G
RESET
VCC
5
VTR UNREG
MODE RESET 10
VOUT
4
RMC PULSE IN 16
73 UNREG DET
Q101
Q104
11 XOUT
X101
16MHz
XRESET 49
S DET 79
EJECT SWITCH 66
8
XCIN
LET CONT 80
WIDE CONT 81
LINE IN 82
9
XCOUT
VCO HI 54
VTOS EN 17
VIC3 CS 48
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
52 VTR POWER SWITCH
VTR ON
DC J DET
A/D I
A/D V
INIT-CHG1
INIT-CHG2
CHAGE
BATT INFO AD
EVF 8.5V ON
BATT E3
INIT-CHG1
INIT-CHG2
VIC3 CLOCK 35
71 DC J DET
VIC3 TO SUBCOM DATA 34
90 A/D I
SUBCOM TO VIC3 DATA 33
89 A/D V
STOV PC
2
99 PS
VTOS PC
1
100 TRI
41 CHAGE
IC100
M30620MCN
MODE MI-COM.
88 BATT INFO A/D
VTOS ACTIVE 24
MTOC MODE2 59
MTOC MODE1 58
MTOC MODE0 57
E3V
96 VREF
E3V+LI3V
97 AVCC
NTSC XPAL 40
CASSETTE IN SWITCH 67
TO
HINGE ASS'Y
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
CN990
LCD 3V
LCD 5V
LCD 8.5V
LCD 15V
LCD −10V
VTR UNREG
PANEL XOE
PANEL LCK
LCD CS
LCD EEP CS
LCD
LCD
LCD
LCD
LCD
VTR
CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0 84
3V
5V
8.5V
15V
−10V
UNREG
60 VCC2
14 VCC1
CASSETTE MEMORY SDA 28
38 PANEL BL ON
CASSETTE MEMORY SDL 27
46 PANEL UD
CASSETTE MEMORY ON 26
63 PANEL LR
61 LCD ON
1
4
5
8
6
9
10
2
CN102
DVDD3V
E3V+LI3V
EPM
CE
CNVSS
FLASH CLK
FLASH RST
FLASH RXD1
FLASH TXD1
MODE RESET
DEBCLK
DEBUD
DEBDD
XDEBEN
CG CS
EEP/CG CLK
EEP/CG SO
DOT CLK
OSD I0
OSD I1
VIC HD
VIC VD
B7
A15
A2
A3
A4
B2
B3
B4
B5
A1
A6
A8
A10
A12
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
CHAGE LED 50
PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SWITCH 65
TO
OPERATION KEY UNIT
N.C
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
VIC VD
VIC HD
OSD I1
OSD I0
DOT CLK
EEP/CG SO
EEP/CG CLK
CGCS
XDEBEN
DEBDD
DEBUD
DEBCLK
ZOOM KEY
VTR POW SW
CAM POW SW
T/C POW SW
FCH O
MODE RESET
RMC IN
XRESET
S DET
EJECT SW
LET CONT
WIDE CONT
LINE IN
VCO HI
VTOS EN
VTOS CS
VTOS SCK
VTOS DATA
STOV DATA
STOV PC
VTOS PC
VTOS ACTIVE
STOV MODE2
STOV MODE1
STOV MODE0
NTSC XPAL
CAS IN
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC 3
MIC ON
CARD DET
CARD PRO
CARD ACC LED
13 XIN
X100
32.768KHz
CN101
CK 3V
PHOTO SW
HALF PHOTO SW
START/STOP SW
TAPE/CARD SW
VTR PW SW
CAM PW SW
ZOOM AD
RKEY P.C.B.
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
TO
RKEY BACKLIGHT ASS'Y
CN100
P5V
KEY LED2
KEY LED1
KEY LED0
1
4
3
2
OSDC/EEPROM/EVFIC/LCDIC/SCK
3
OSDC/EEPROM/EVFIC/LCDIC/SO
19 EVF SEN
FF
CN103
PANEL OPEN SW
TO
DSW2 P.C.B.
TO
HINGE ASS'Y
2
TO
SERVO SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
CN101
PANEL B/T SW
CARD P.C.B.
55 EVF 3V ON
TO
CAC P.C.B.
CN1002
A34
A33
A31
A32
A35
A27
A30
A28
56 EVF BL ON
CN1101
EVF EEP SIN
LCD EEP SCK
LCD EEP SOUT
EVF SEN
EVF 3V ON
EVF BL ON
EVF EEP CS
EVF 8.5V
LITHIUM
BATTERY
DIAL CCW SWITCH 43
KEY AD2 93
KEY AD3 95
45 EVF EEPROM CS
Q103
KEY LED2 21
KEY LED1 22
20 EVF 8.5V ON
Q990
Q991
KEY LED0 23
Q102
TO
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
01
CARD DAT1
CARD DAT
CARD SCK
CARD DAT3
CARD CMD
CARD DAT2
Feb. 2003
12
17
19
7
18
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
2
3
4
9
13
15
SW4001
SW4002
DE SEL
CARD MIX
SW4000
SW4003
DE ON/OFF
SELF
CN102
REW KEY
KEY AD2
P5V
KEY LED2
KEY LED1
KEY LED0
PANEL OPEN SW
PANEL B/T SW
1
2
6
3
4
5
7
8
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
DM-MV650i E
DM-MV630i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
BT400
LI 3V
PANEL OPEN SWITCH 64
CN100
CARD ACC LED
CARD PRO
CARD DET
CHAGE LED
PANEL B/T SW
KEY AD0
KEY AD1
PAE/GREEN
PANEL OPEN SW
DIAL CW
DIAL CCW
KEY AD2
KEY AD3
KEY LED2
KEY LED1
KEY LED0
KEY LED0
CARD DAT2
CARD CMD
CARD DAT3
CARD SCK
CARD DAT
CARD DAT1
P5V
PLAY
BT401
PAE/GREEN SW 75
DIAL CW SWITCH 42
REW
SW102
KEY AD1 92
LCD EEP SIN
5
SW103
STOP
SW101
KEY AD0 91
4
SW100
P5V
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
15
10
13
11
21
26
14
16
18
20
24
27
29
30
31
CN4001
KEY LED0
KEY LED1
KEY LED2
KEY AD3
KEY AD2
DIAL CCW
DIAL CW
PANEL OPEN SW
PANEL B/T SW
PAE/GREEN
KEY AD0
KEY AD1
CARD ACC LED
CHAGE LED
CARD DET
CARD PRO
CARD DAT1
CARD DAT
CARD SCK
DVDD 3V
CARD DAT3
CARD CMD
CARD DAT2
SW4004
GREEN
P AE
Q4000
4
VTR UNREG
LED4000
P5V
3
2
6
1
5
CN4002
REW KEY
DIAL PUSH
MENU
KEY AD2
KEY LED2
KEY LED1
KEY LED0
PANEL OPEN SW
PANEL B/T SW
DIAL CCW
DIAL CW
P5V
14
5
1
13
12
11
10
8
7
4
3
9
CN4000
CARD DET
CARD PRO
MMC DAT2
MMC DAT1
MMC DAT
MMC CLK
MMC VDD
MMC CMD
MMC RSV
12
10
9
8
7
5
4
2
1
C
SD CARD
ZR70 MC A
ZR65 MC A
DM-MV650i E
DM-MV630i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
CANON INC. 2003
SERVO SECTION
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
DMC III
MAIN P.C.B. (3/6)
D.W 37
D.V 35
D.U 34
D.COM 33
TO
MAIN P.C.B
D
D
C
C
VM
VS
VM
VS
D VM
28 D.VM
D.PGIN− 20
D VS
29 D.VS
D.FGPGIN+ 19
60 C.VM
D.FGIN− 18
61 C.VS
C VS
C.HW− 12
CFG
15 C.FGSMT
C.HW+ 11
DPG
16 D.PGSMT
C.HU+ 10
DFG
21 D.FGSMT
C.HU−
9
30 D.EC
C.HV+
8
C.HV−
7
40 L.FRB
41 L.REF
IC301
BD6636KV
MOTOR DRIVE
C.FGIN− 14
Q304
57 D.PS
C.FGIN+ 13
DVDD 3V
TO
MAIN P.C.B
TO
MAIN P.C.B
CFG
DPG
DFG
DERR
LOAD FR
LODE ON
DRUM ON
CAP ON
CAP FWD
CERR
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
DA CFG
DEW
MSW AD
TAPE TOP
TAPE END
TAPE LED
REC PROOF
REEL LED CONT
DA TREEL
DA SREEL
MIC2
MIC3
C.U
2
59 C.FBR
C.V
3
62 C.EC
C.W
5
27 UNREG
L.REV 44
DVDD 3V
22 VCC
L.FWD 42
P 5V
45 L.VM
R.IN1+ 46
VTR UNREG
TO
MAIN P.C.B
58 C.PS
R.IN2+ 49
51 ROUT2
R.IN2− 50
Feb. 2003
CN302
C H−
W−
W+
C H+
U+
U−
V+
V−
CFG2
CFG1
U COIL
U COIL
W COIL
W COIL
V COIL
V COIL
CFG VCC
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
17
DRUM
MOTOR
PG
FG
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
FG
LOADING
MOTOR
DVDD 3V
CN301
LOAD (−)
LOAD (−)
LOAD (+)
LOAD (+)
DEW+
MSW SENS
MSW VCC
MSW VSS
4
5
9
10
3
6
7
8
MODE SW
TAPE END
SENSOR
BOT DET
EOT DET
DVDD 3V
Q303
Q303
Q302
Q301
P 5V
Q300
Q305
CAS IN
MIC1
MIC2
MIC3
MIC ON
IC300
NJM12904R
OPE AMP
01
1
2
8
9
10
11
3
6
7
5
DEW SENSOR
R.IN1− 47
48 ROUT1
CN300
W
W
V
V
U
U
COIL COM
DPG
DFG
SENS COM
IN+1
3
OUT 1
1
IN−1
2
OUT 2
7
IN−2
6
IN+2
5
DVDD 3V
CN303
BOT E
BOT C
EOT E
EOT C
LED A
LED K
REC PRF
MIC3
MIC2
MIC1
C IN
T IN−
T IN+
T OUT−
T OUT+
S IN−
S IN+
S OUT−
S OUT+
TAPE TOP
SENSOR
1
2
20
21
14
15
5
4
6
7
12
8
10
9
11
16
18
17
19
SAFETY
SW
MIC
CASSETTE IN SW
FG
TAKE UP
REEL
FG
SUPPLY
REEL
C
CANON INC. 2003
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
CARD
USB/SIC SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (4/6)
NTSC
iPAL
ONLY
CN2101
CLAMP
48
EQ
Y LINE IN
75Ω
75Ω
Q2104
Y IN
CLAMP Y
REC C
34
30
17
Y OUT
C OUT
TO
VIC VD
C OUT
SERIAL DATA
25
WIDE
DETECT
CLK DATA
15
CS
VIC VD
VCC
Q2100
VIF 4.7V
7
11
20
26
31
32
37
45
47
12
13
14
19
VIF 4.7V
AV SCLK
AV SO
VIF CS
Q2106
Q2102
EXT
DETECT
233
364
298
248
257
154
CSYNC I
ADV MIC L
ADV MIC R
SHOE ID1
SHOE ON
VCLK
C CONT
27
Y OUT
Q3501
CLAMP
10
CSYNC I
Y IN
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
40
21
Q701
ZR70 MC A
DM-MV650i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
36
BPF
V OUT
Q2105
RMC IN
EJECT SW
S DET
LET CONT
WIDE CONT
LINE IN
X RESET
LPF
Y/C SEP
AA 4.7V
ZR70 MC A
DM-MV650i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
4
Y CONT
Q2101
C LINE IN
Q3503
CLAMP
46
75Ω
Q2103
2
27MHz
GCA
AVDD 1.4V
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
C SYNC SEP
VCLK
V I/O/H/P R
Y I/O
C I/O
AV L/HP L
AV R
D−
D+
V BUS
CAM LED
AV DET
EXT PDET
EXT R
EXT L
SP −
SP +
S DET
EJECT SW
RMC IN
IC2100
LD502U
VIF2
C IN
11
34
37
15
14
26
27
23
8
12
3
4
2
22
21
33
31
19
V LINE IN
CLAMP Y
TO
JACK P.C.B.
CN7
VIC VD
DATA COMMUNICATION
SCLK2 261
TO
SERVO SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
267 TMS
112 TCK
AA3V
AA4.7V
28
42
85 C O
FROM
AUDIO VIDEO
SECTION-2
IC2301 (3/3)
88 VRL 2
MIC2
MIC3
10
14
13
39
41
20
58
30
GAIN AMP
LINE AMP
DAC
CONTROL
REGISTER
34
AIF CS
35
AV SO
33
HP AMP
205 34 275 123 332 204 33 122 32 203 121 331 31 273 202 120
330 DN
Q3502
AV SCLK
VBUS
CAM LED
15 SCS9
338 XECS4
16 SCS5
107 SCS6
36
9
CDATA7
339 AIN 14
EADDR (0) 279
EADDR (0)
E1 A0
129
EADDR (1)
D1
210
EADDR (2)
C1
DO0 E2
EDATA (0)
40
EADDR (3)
A1
H2
EDATA (1)
337
EADDR (4)
B1
E3
EDATA (2)
39
EADDR (5)
D2
H3
EDATA (3)
128
EADDR (6)
C2
H4
EDATA (4)
209
EADDR (7)
A2
E4
EDATA (5)
38
EADDR (8)
B5
H5
EDATA (6)
336
EADDR (9)
A5
E5
EDATA (7)
127
EADDR (10)
C5
F2
EDATA (8)
208
EADDR (11)
D5
G2
EDATA (9)
37
EADDR (12)
B6
F3
EDATA (10)
277
EADDR (13)
A6
G3
EDATA (11)
126
EADDR (14)
C6
F4
EDATA (12)
335
EADDR (15)
D6
G5
EDATA (13)
334
EADDR (16)
E6
F5
EDATA (14)
36
EADDR (17)
B2
DO15 G6
EDATA (15)
125
EADDR (18)
C3
206
EADDR (19)
D4 A19
276
EADDR (20)
D3 NC3
27 ICD0
IC801
AK4561
AUDIO
INTERFACE
CR
NETWORK
64
1
CR
NETWORK
2
3
4
6
7
40
54
53
PRE AMP
INV AMP
EQ AMP
HPF
50
(R)
49
48
47
46
CR
NETWORK
44
43
38
31
147 LPS
32
280 XECS2
24
AMCK
22
WCK
23
LRCK
20 PWM4
LINE
MIC
60
AD OFF
REC MUTE
CLOCK
DIVIDER
MIC
61
CN701
INT MIC R
INT MIC L
ALC AMP
ADC
AUDIO I/F
CONTROL
25
FORM
CAMERA
SECTION
26
LINE
IC2301 (2/3)
MB87M1254
VIC3
CR
NETWORK
Q810,Q811
POWER OFF
MUTE OFF
MUTE
Q802
Q806
AUDIO MUTE
131 XECS1
Q812
Q804
Q808
4
5
HP ON
HP MUTE
8
P 5V
5
V IN
V OUT
4
6
IC802
NJM2770R
SP DRIVER
4V
Vcc
1
IC803
TK11140CS
4V REGULATOR
291 D5
225 D4
Q807
V REF
Feb. 2003
AIF CS
329 DP
D+
11
AUDIO MUTE
01
SCS2 191
136 AIN13
D−
HP AMP
12
MIC
VIF CS
249 VRH 2
15
16
2
4
AV SO
SCS3 17
EDATA (15)
250 Y O
POWER SUPPLY
SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
VTR ON
9
(L)
AV SCLK
SO2 321
113 TDO
EDATA (0)
N.C
CN2900
B8
TMS
A7
TCK
B10
TDO
A1
V I/O
B7
TRST
B5
MIC2
B6
MIC3
B3 VTR ON IC3201
Q805
35
XERD 43
XEWRU 44
Q801
SP STANDBY
F1 CE
EADDR (22) 333
XECSO 212
Q803
IC2300
MBM29LV160BE7OPBT
FLASH
G1 OE
A4 WE
27M
TCK
TMS
EADATA (0) to (15)
EADDR (0) to (22)
XERD
XEWRU
TRST
AUD 2 I
MACS1 I
B4 RESET
TRST 23
146 D3
XRESET 135
C
TO
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
CANON INC. 2003
DIGITAL DV SIGNAL
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
DIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL)
MAIN P.C.B. (5/6)
DQ14 51
DQ15 53
A0 23
A1 24
IC2302
W986416DH-7
SDRAM
A2 25
A3 26
A4 29
A5 30
A6 31
A7 32
A8 33
A9 34
A10/AP 22
A11 35
A12(BA1) 21
A13(BA0) 20
DQML 15
/WE 16
/CAS 17
/RAS 18
/CS 19
CKE 37
CLK 38
DQMU 39
355 MDATA (9)
MDATA (10)
D0 226
75 MDATA (11)
MDATA (12)
D1 347
302 MDATA (12)
MDATA (13)
D2 59
238 MDATA (13)
MDATA (14)
CTL0 145
160 MDATA (14)
MDATA (15)
CTL1 224
74 MDATA (15)
ADDR (0)
SYSCLK 57
82 ADDR (0)
ADDR (1)
AIN7 285
167 ADDR (1)
ADDR (2)
AIN10 216
244 ADDR (2)
ADDR (3)
XEINT2 214
306 ADDR (3)
ADDR (4)
ICD1 198
81 ADDR (4)
ADDR (5)
SCS0 264
359 ADDR (5)
ADDR (6)
UAT CLK 192
243 ADDR (6)
ADDR (7)
TX 325
80 ADDR (7)
ADDR (8)
RX 19
305 ADDR (8)
ADDR (9)
XDEBEN 272
165 ADDR (9)
ADDR (10)
242 ADDR (11)
ADDR (12)
ADDR (13)
DEBCLK 28
ICS2 117
304 ADDR (13)
DQML
SO1 188
360 DQML
XWE
SCLK1 187
83 XWE
XCAS
SCLK0 104
169 XCAS
XRAS
SO0 322
OSD I0
OSD I1
DOT CLK
STOV MODE0
STOV MODE1
STOV MODE2
STOV PC
CG CS
VTOS CS
ZOOM KEY
CARD DET
CARD PRO
CARD ACCESS LED
VTOS EN
VTOS SCK
VTOS DATA
STOV DATA
XDEBEN
DEBUD
DEBDD
DEBCLK
NTSC XPAL
EEP/CG SO
EEP/CG CLK
VTOS ACTIVE
VTOS PC
246 XRAS
XCS
362 XCS
CKE
307 CKE
MCLK
REC H 63
HA 3V
HA 4.7V
5
38
CN2900
VTR POW SW
T/C POW SW
CAM POW SW
FCH 0
SWP
PBRF
A3
A4
A5
A6
A8
A10
CN2000
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
2
3
5
6
NC
168 MCLK
DQMU
361 DQMU
DRUM ON
REC PROOF
REEL LED CONT
DA CFG
DA SREEL
DA TREEL
TAPE TOP
TAPE END
MSW AD
DEW
CAS IN
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
DERR
CERR
CFG
DPG
DFG
CAP FWD
TAPE LED
36
26 ICLK
UTIL SWP 5 252
32
RDAT 150
35
116 ICD3
REC CONT
21
IC2000
LD502WA
VRP2
REC
ON
46
270 ICD2
45
213 BRQ
268 TCLK
43
45 BGRNTX
34
XRDAT 294
42
265 PWM7
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
CH-1
HEAD
CH-2
HEAD
DRUM
UNIT
40
110 PWM6
193 PWM5
39
341 AIN0
SDLSEL 350
9
286 AIN1
PB H 229
218 AIN2
1
SDL
PB ON
Q2000
138 AIN3
6
48 AIN12
68 RFGT
232 RFGS
SWP 65
2
PBRF 158
17
VIDEO SIGNAL
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION–1
IC2301 (2/3)
296 PWMD
153 PWMC
AUDIO SIGNAL
67 CFG
VCA
TO
CAMERA SECTION–2
IC2301 (1/3)
66 DPG
GOH
GDL
EQ
VCO
231 DFG
152 ROFS
58 D6
EQFC
RAGC
RAPC
RAFC
RCLK
XRCLK
230 151 176 353 295 93
Feb. 2003
DEBDD 200
164 ADDR (12)
CAP ON
01
DEBUD 118
IC2301(3/3)
MB87M1255
VIC3
358 ADDR (10)
ADDR (11)
LOAD ON
LOAD FR
LOAD ON
CAP ON
DRUM ON
REC PROOF
REEL LED CONT
DA CFG
DA SREEL
DA TREEL
TAPE TOP
TAPE END
MSW AD
DEW
CAS IN
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
DERR
CERR
CFG
DPG
DFG
CAP FWD
TAPE LED
DOT CLK 156
161 MDATA (10)
MDATA (11)
LOAD FR
TO
SERVO SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
OSD I1 70
1
177 313
29
30
13
11
12
8
25
26
28
22
23
XRCLK
DQ13 50
OSD I0 234
356 MDATA (8)
MDATA (9)
RCLK
DQ12 48
76 MDATA (7)
MDATA (8)
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
VIC VD
VIC HD
OSD I0
OSD I1
DOT CLK
STOV MODE0
STOV MODE1
STOV MODE2
STOV PC
CG CS
VTOS CS
ZOOM KEY
CARD DET
CARD PRO
CARD ACCESS LED
VTOS EN
VTOS SCK
VTOS DATA
STOV DATA
XDEBEN
DEBUD
DEBDD
DEBCLK
NTSC XPAL
EEP/CG SO
EEP/CG CLK
VTOS ACTIVE
VTOS PC
VCO HI
VTR POW SW
T/C POW SW
CAM POW SW
FCH 0
VIC HD
EQFC
DQ11 47
MDATA (7)
HD 155
RAFC
DQ10 45
VD 233
162 MDATA (6)
VIC VD
RAPC
DQ9 44
MDATA (6)
TO
DV TERMINAL
1
2
3
4
TO
VIC VD
240 MDATA (5)
RAGC
DQ8 42
303 MDATA (4)
MDATA (5)
EQ CONT
DQ7 13
49 VCCQ4
XTPB 141
GDL CONT
DQ6 11
43 VCCQ3
TPB 53
357 MDATA (3)
GDH CONT
27 VCC3
163 MDATA (2)
UTIL SWP 1
8
DQ5 10
MDATA (4)
XTPB
TPB
XTPA
TPA
UTIL SWP 0
DQ4
14 VCC2
MDATA (3)
GDH CONT
7
GDL CONT
5
DQ3
XTPA 220
UTIL SWP 3
DQ2
241 MDATA (1)
UTIL SWP 2
VCCQ2
MDATA (2)
TPA 140
RAGC
VCCQ1
9
4
78 MDATA (0)
EQ CONT
3
DQ1
MDATA (1)
UTIL SWP 4
VCC1
CN2501
MDATA (0)
RAPC
1
2
RCLK
DQ0
XRCLK
SDRAM
2.7V
C
CANON INC. 2003
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.(6/6)
CN891
SHOE UNREG
SHOE UNREG
ID-1
ADV MIC L
ADV MIC R
Q3209
FU3205
TO
DC P.C.B.
DC JACK
2
3
1
CN3201
DC +
DC J SW
DC −
Q3210
ZR70 MC A
DM-MV650i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
FU3201
FU3202
Q1805
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
Q1804
6
5
4
1
Q1802
2
VTR UNREG
OSC
46
3
CH1
Q3204
1.4V (CH1)
33
DC J DET
INIT-CHG2
INIT-CHG1
CHAGE
A/D I
VTR ON
EVF 8.5V ON
A/D V
BATT INFO AD
BATTA E3
43
27 VCC
Q1808
Q1807
2
1
4
50
3
5
CH2
53
MICOM UNREG
CN3202
BATT E3
BATT INFO AD
BATT −
BATT −
BATT +
BATT +
LPF
MACS 1.4V
LPF
DVDD 1.4V
LPF
AVDD 1.4V
LPF
HA 3V
LPF
IRIS 3V
LPF
LCD 3V
LPF
CAM 3V
LPF
AA 3V
LPF
DVDD 3V
40
D1802
1
2
3
4
5
6
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
C VS
D VS
FU3204
34
TO
BATTERY TERMIANL
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
ADV MIC R
ADV MIC L
SHOE ID1
SHOE ON
Q1806
D1801
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
TO
SHOE CONNECTOR ASS'Y
FU3203
Q1803
8
1
2
5
8
9
Q3205
3V (CH3)
CH3
2
1
4
56
5
D1803
3
FU1801
3
IC3201
MB3881
DC/DC
CONVERTER
1
2
5
Q3206
P5V (CH4)
7
6
4
IC3204
TK11125CS V OUT
2.5V REGULATOR
4
IC3203
TK11147CS V OUT
4.7V REGULATOR
4
5
V IN
IC1802
MM6564XF
OPE/AMP
AVDD 2.7V
LPF
SDRAM 2.7V
LPF
DIF 2.7V
5
V IN
2
1
DVDD 2.5V
4
57
LPF
5
37
CH4
IC3202
TK11128CS V OUT
2.7V REGULATOR
V IN
3
LPF
AA 4.7V
LPF
VIF 4.7V
LPF
HA 4.7V
LPF
LCD 5V
5
P 5V
21
Q3207
DRUM VS (CH5)
CH5
22
2
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
D VM
C VS
1
4
60
3
5
15
Q3208
CAP VS (CH6)
CH6
16
2
1
D3202
4
61
LPF
3
5
DVDD 3V
6
5
4
1
2
3
11
ON/OFF
CONT.
VTR ON
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
28
CH1,3,4,8
30
CH5,6
31
CH7
29
CH2
LCD 8.5V
Q3200
CH7
T3201
Q3201
62
4
D3204
5
LPF
LCD −10V
LPF
LCD 15V
LPF
CCD −7V
LPF
CCD 15V
3
5
2
7
CH8
64
D3201
8
1
Q3202
T3202
D3205
4
5
3
2
7
1
01
Feb. 2003
8
D3203
C
CANON INC. 2003
LCD P.C.B. SECTION
DATA COMMUNICATION
LCD P.C.B.
LCD UNREG
5
1
ON
T4201
CPU9D25
VTR UNREG
4
CONTROL
Q4201
SWITCH
4
7
3
3
Q902
LCD 8.5V
6
5
1
4
2
2
IC4201
R1223N152H
DC/DC
CONVERTER
CONTROL
LCD 7.5V
3
1
3
2
Q4202
DRIVER
1
5
6
5
VTR UNREG
4
Q903
WP4201
Q4203
BACK LIGHT
WP4202
LCD 3V
Q912
TO
HINGE ASS'Y
LCD 15V
9
VTR UNREG
SO
CLK
LCK
OE
6
3V ON
Q2
7
5V ON
25
Q904
2
DATA
3
CLK
4
LCK
IC902
BU2092FV
SERI/PARA
CONVERTER
Q5 10
2
R
R OUT
CLAMP
GCA
15V ON
48
G
CLAMP
CNTRST
GAMMA
S/H
G OUT
BRIGHT
GCA
Q6 11
BL ON
1
B
LCD 5V
5V ON
Q4
LCD-10V
OE
LCK
LCS
ECS
Q1
18
VCC3
Q901
20
LCD 8.5V
VDD
LCD 3V
LCD 5V
LCD 8.5V
LCD 15V
LCD -10V
VTR UNREG
PANEL XOE
PANEL LCK
LCD CS
LCD EEP CS
VCC2
CN902
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
7.5V
Q911
LCD 3V
LCD 5V
B OUT
CLAMP
Q910
16
14
CN903
VGL
VCC
AVDD
VR
VG
VB
L/R
STHR
STHL
CPH3
CPH2
CPH1
STVR
STVL
CKV
DEV
Q1H
OEH
VCOM
VGH
11
GCA
19 OE
43 VDD
E CS
CLK
SO
SO
44 VCC1
1
CS
2
SK
3
DI
4
DO
3V ON
IC901
BR9010RFV-W
EEPROM
RL
Q906
STH2
VCC
8
LCD 3V
STH1
LCD 3V
CPH3
PLL
47
CPH2
CPH1
CN901
TO
HINGE ASS'Y
5
6
7
4
1
2
3
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
C SYNC
LCD EEP SOUT
LCD EEP SCK
SIN 1
STV1
TIMING
GENERATOR
STV2
CPV
SO
CLK
SO
L CS
CLK
SO
37
38
39
OEV
CS
CLK
D1
S
I/F
QH
CONTROL
IC903
AN2545NFHQ
LCD DRIVE
OEH
COMDC
VCOM
41
19
20
22
23
24
29
30
31
32
1
8
11
15
16
17
13
12
24
19
20
21
3
7
5
6
22
23
10
9
LCD UNIT
LCD
33
LCD 15V
34
Q905
8
LCD 7.5V
15V ON
9
Q908
6
5
1 Q907
01
Feb. 2003
4
2
6
3
1
5 4
2
3
4
2
1
Q909
3
5
6
C
CANON INC. 2003
JACK P.C.B. SECTION
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
CARD
USB/SIC SIGNAL
JACK P.C.B.
SPEAKER
CN1
MIC JACK
CN5
1
2
SP +
SP −
LED1
ZD1
CN7
TO
MAIN P.C.B.
CN2101
TO
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
CN2101
18
17
31
37
36
35
25
27
28
24
16
13
12
20
8
6
5
2
21
9
SP +
SP −
CAM LED
EXT L
EXT P DET
EXT R
AV R
AV DET
V I/O/HP R
AV L/HP L
VBUS
D−
D+
RMC IN
EJECT SW
S DET
Y I/O
C I/O
P GY OUT
Y GY OUT
AV JACK
CN2
4
IC1601
ENC.03JA VCC
P SENSOR GYRO
OUT
1
CN3
VBUS (+5V)
D−
D+
1
2
3
CN6
EJECT SW
2
USB JACK
TO
EJECT SW
ZR70 MC A
ZR65MC
DM-MV650i E
DM-MV630i E
DM-FV40
ONLY
CAM3V
S JACK
Y
C
G1
G2
CN4
4
01
Feb. 2003
IC1602
OUT
ENC.03JB VCC
Y SENSOR GYRO
1
CAM3V
C
CANON INC. 2003

ZR70 MC A ZR65 MC A ZR60 A ZR70 MC A ZR65 MC A ZR60 A

Transcription

Similar documents